]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - etc/NEWS
*** empty log message ***
[gnu-emacs] / etc / NEWS
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 See the end for copying conditions.
4
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS
7
8 \f
9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
11 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
13 ** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
15 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for
19 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20 to list them.
21
22 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
23 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
24
25 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
29 support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
30 maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31 build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32 necessary changes to unexec.
33
34 ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35 new display features described below.
36
37 ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
38 all of the new display features described below. The port currently
39 lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support.
40
41 \f
42 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
43
44 ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
45 trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
46 this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
47
48 ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
49 be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
50
51 ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
52 To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
53 `auto-compression-mode' command.
54
55 ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
56 `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
57
58 +++
59 ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
60 operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
61
62 ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
63 (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
64 remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
65 may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
66
67 +++
68 ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
69 is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
70
71 +++
72 ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
73 mode `iswitchb-mode'.
74
75 +++
76 ** Gnus changes.
77
78 The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
79 four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
80 internationalization and mail-fetching.
81
82 *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
83 many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
84
85 If you used procmail like in
86
87 (setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
88 (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
89 (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
90 (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
91
92 this now has changed to
93
94 (setq mail-sources
95 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
96 :suffix ".in")))
97
98 More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
99 Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
100
101 *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
102 Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
103 Separate MIME packages like RMIME, SEMI, mime-compose etc., will
104 probably no longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
105
106 *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
107 parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
108 are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
109 now just a compatibility layer.
110
111 *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
112 called to position point.
113
114 *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
115 summary buffers and NOV files.
116
117 *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
118 of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
119
120 *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
121 subtly different manner.
122
123 *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
124 and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
125 ever-changing layouts.
126
127 *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
128
129 *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
130
131 ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
132 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
133 more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
134 empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
135 window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
136 on.
137
138 ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
139 set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
140 file that is already visited under a different name.
141
142 ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
143 nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
144
145 ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
146 recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
147 signaled.
148
149 ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
150 support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
151 use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
152 buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
153 M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
154 new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
155
156 +++
157 ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
158 and displays information about that.
159
160 ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
161 file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
162
163 ** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
164 added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
165 Postscript files are included.
166
167 ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
168 `dired-ref.tex'.
169
170 ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
171 expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
172
173 This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
174 determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
175 mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
176 interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
177 regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
178 associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
179
180 +++
181 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
182 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
183 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
184 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
185
186 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
187 a version-dependent component.
188
189 ** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
190 Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
191 will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
192 character is still bound as before.
193
194 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
195 using that menu.
196
197 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
198 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
199
200 +++
201 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
202 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
203 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
204 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
205 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
206 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
207 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
208
209 +++
210 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
211 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
212 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
213 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
214 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
215 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
216 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
217 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
218 RET C-x C-f filename RET.
219
220 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
221 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
222
223 +++
224 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
225 point in a pop-up window.
226
227 +++
228 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
229 displays all characters in that character set.
230
231 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
232 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
233
234 +++
235 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
236 on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
237 defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
238 commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
239
240 +++
241 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
242
243 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
244 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
245
246 +++
247 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
248 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
249 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
250 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
251
252 +++
253 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
254 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
255 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
256 You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
257
258 +++
259 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
260 on the display using several methods
261
262 +++
263 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
264 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
265 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
266
267 +++
268 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
269 equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
270
271 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
272
273 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
274 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
275
276 +++
277 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
278 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
279 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
280 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
281
282 +++
283 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
284 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
285 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
286
287 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
288 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
289
290 +++
291 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
292 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
293 this behavior.
294
295 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
296 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
297 Emacs dump core.
298
299 +++
300 ** New X resources recognized
301
302 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
303 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
304 is useful for debugging X problems.
305
306 Example:
307
308 emacs.synchronous: true
309
310 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
311 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
312 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
313 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
314 visual class names are
315
316 TrueColor
317 PseudoColor
318 DirectColor
319 StaticColor
320 GrayScale
321 StaticGray
322
323 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
324 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
325 meaning.
326
327 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
328 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
329 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
330 visual.
331
332 Example:
333
334 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
335
336 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
337 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
338 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
339 resource values are `true' or `on'.
340
341 Example:
342
343 emacs.privateColormap: true
344
345 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
346 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
347 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
348
349 ** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
350 display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
351 shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
352 be customized.
353
354 +++
355 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
356
357 +++
358 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
359 all frames except the selected one.
360
361 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
362 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
363
364 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
365 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
366 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
367 displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
368
369 +++
370 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
371 MS-DOS version of Emacs.
372
373 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
374 read mail from the menu etc.
375
376 +++
377 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
378 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
379
380 ** Changes in Texinfo mode.
381
382 *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
383 macros
384
385 Key binding Macro
386 -------------------------
387 C-c C-c C-s @strong
388 C-c C-c C-e @emph
389 C-c C-c u @uref
390 C-c C-c q @quotation
391 C-c C-c m @email
392 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
393 M-RET @item
394
395 *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
396
397 ** Changes in Outline mode.
398
399 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
400 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
401 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
402
403 ** Changes to Emacs Server
404
405 +++
406 *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
407 with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
408 are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
409 Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
410 buffers to kill, as before.
411
412 Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
413 i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
414 this way.
415
416 ** Changes to Show Paren mode.
417
418 *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
419 The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
420 use. Default is 1000.
421
422 +++
423 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
424 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
425
426 +++
427 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
428 M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
429 M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
430 buffers.
431
432 +++
433 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
434 under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
435 .emacs file.
436
437 The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
438 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
439
440 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
441 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
442 `directory-abbrev-alist'.
443
444 ** Faces and frame parameters.
445
446 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
447 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
448 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
449 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
450 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
451 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
452 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
453
454 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
455 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
456 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
457 `default' face and vice versa.
458
459 +++
460 ** New face `menu'.
461
462 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
463 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
464 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
465
466 +++
467 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
468
469 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
470 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
471 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
472 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
473
474 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
475 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
476 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
477
478 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
479 `ScreenGamma'.
480
481 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
482
483 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
484 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
485 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
486 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
487 the text.
488
489 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
490
491 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
492 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
493 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
494 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
495 specify a font.
496
497 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
498 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
499 under Lisp changes, below.
500
501 ** New default font is Courier 12pt.
502
503 +++
504 ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
505 of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
506 otherwise, it is hollow.
507
508 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
509 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
510 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
511 customizing face `fringe'.
512
513 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
514 You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
515
516 The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
517 versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
518 and its use is deprecated.
519
520 ** LessTif support.
521
522 Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
523 You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
524
525 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
526
527 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
528 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
529 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
530 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
531 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
532 Emacs.
533
534 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
535 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
536 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
537 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
538 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
539 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
540
541 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
542 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
543 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
544 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
545 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
546 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
547
548 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
549 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
550 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
551 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
552 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
553
554 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
555
556 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
557 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
558 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
559
560 +++
561 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
562
563 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
564 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
565 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
566 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
567 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
568 whitespace.
569
570 +++
571 ** Busy-cursor.
572
573 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
574 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
575
576 +++
577 ** Blinking cursor
578
579 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
580 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
581 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
582 the group `cursor'.
583
584 +++
585 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
586
587 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
588 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
589 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
590 details.
591
592 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
593 have to do anything to activate it.
594
595 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
596
597 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
598 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
599 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
600 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
601
602 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
603
604 +++
605 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
606
607 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
608
609 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
610 LessTif/Motif one.
611
612 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
613 LessTif and Motif.
614
615 +++
616 ** Hscrolling in C code.
617
618 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
619 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
620 customized.
621
622 +++
623 ** Tool bar support.
624
625 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
626 of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
627 changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
628 displayed and is on by default. To make the tool bar more useful, we
629 need contributions of extra icons for specific modes (with copyright
630 assignments).
631
632 +++
633 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
634
635 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
636 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
637 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
638 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
639 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
640
641 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
642
643 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
644 buffers.
645
646 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
647 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
648
649 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
650
651 - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
652 `*') toggles the status.
653
654 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
655
656 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
657
658 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
659 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
660 non-nil.
661
662 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
663
664 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
665 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
666 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
667 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
668 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
669 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
670 on terminals.
671
672 The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
673 supported on character terminals.
674
675 ** Sound support
676
677 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
678 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
679 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
680
681 +++
682 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
683 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
684 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
685 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
686 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
687 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
688
689 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
690
691 +++
692 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
693
694 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
695 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
696 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
697
698 +++
699 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
700 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
701
702 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
703 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
704 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
705
706 +++
707 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
708
709 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
710 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
711 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
712 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
713
714 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
715 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
716 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
717 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
718
719 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
720 notably at the end of lines.
721
722 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
723 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
724
725 +++
726 There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
727
728 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
729 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
730 after each match to get the replacement text.
731
732 +++
733 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
734 you edit the replacement string.
735
736 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
737 you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
738 lisp-complete-symbol.
739
740 +++
741 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
742
743 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
744 longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
745 is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
746 minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
747
748 - User option: max-mini-window-height
749
750 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
751 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
752 specifies a number of lines.
753
754 Default is 0.25.
755
756 - User option: resize-mini-windows
757
758 How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
759 resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
760 grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
761 again.
762
763 Default is `grow-only'.
764
765 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
766
767 ** Changes to hideshow.el
768
769 Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
770 selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
771 conventional keybindings.
772
773 *** Generalized block selection and traversal
774
775 A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
776 (both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
777 which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
778 `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
779 point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
780 (which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
781
782 If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
783 i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
784 backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
785 the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
786
787 *** Isearch support for updating mode line
788
789 During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
790 blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
791 line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
792 portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
793 is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
794
795 To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
796 something like this in your .emacs.
797
798 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
799 (lambda ()
800 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
801
802 *** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
803
804 Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
805 header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
806 `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
807 moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
808 block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
809 behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
810 useful.
811
812 You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
813 function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
814 of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
815 code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
816 appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
817
818 (defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
819 (hs-hide-level 1)
820 (forward-sexp 1))
821 (setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
822
823 The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
824 emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
825 only for code blocks.
826
827 *** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
828
829 Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
830 parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
831 display for implementation.
832
833 *** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
834
835 The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
836 LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
837 which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
838 new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
839
840 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
841 hs-show-block C-c C-s
842 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
843 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
844 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
845 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
846 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
847
848 These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
849
850 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
851
852 +++
853 *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
854 an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
855 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
856
857 +++
858 **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
859 current buffer.
860
861 +++
862 *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
863 in a log file.
864
865 +++
866 *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
867 entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
868
869 +++
870 *** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
871 version number is performed based on regular expressions from
872 `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
873 Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
874
875 *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
876
877 ** Changes to cmuscheme
878
879 *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
880 `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
881
882 ** Changes in Font Lock
883
884 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
885 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
886
887 *** multiline patterns are now supported.
888
889 *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
890 the face used for each string/comment.
891
892 *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
893 Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
894
895 ** Comint (subshell) changes
896
897 These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
898 include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
899
900 *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
901 to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
902 parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
903 user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
904 this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
905 respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
906 feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
907 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
908
909 *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
910 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
911
912 *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
913 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
914 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
915
916 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
917 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
918 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
919
920 *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
921 and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
922 see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
923
924 *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
925 saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
926 argument, it appends to the file.
927
928 *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
929 (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
930 compatibility.
931
932 *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
933 ring (history).
934
935 ** Changes to Rmail mode
936
937 *** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
938 set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
939 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
940 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
941 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
942 as correspondent.
943
944 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
945 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
946 regexp matching your mail addresses.
947
948 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
949 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
950 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
951 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
952 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
953
954 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
955 like `j'.
956
957 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
958 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
959 digest message.
960
961 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
962 in which folder to put messages automatically.
963
964 ** Changes to TeX mode
965
966 *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
967 `latex-mode'.
968
969 *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
970
971 *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
972
973 *** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
974
975 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
976
977 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
978 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
979 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
980 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
981 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
982 can be edited from that buffer.
983
984 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
985 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
986 `A' to use all marked entries).
987
988 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
989 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
990
991 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
992 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
993 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
994 been cited.
995
996 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
997 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
998 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
999 in column 1 are always made leaves.
1000
1001 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1002 has the following new features:
1003
1004 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1005 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1006 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1007 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1008
1009 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1010 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1011 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1012 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1013 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1014 defaults to 1.
1015
1016 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
1017 file names.
1018
1019 +++
1020 ** Tooltips.
1021
1022 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
1023 mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1024 turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
1025
1026 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1027 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1028 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1029 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1030
1031 +++
1032 ** Customize changes
1033
1034 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
1035 `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1036 cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
1037
1038 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1039 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1040 default).
1041
1042 *** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1043 between custom options. Example:
1044
1045 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1046 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1047 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1048 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1049 :group 'mule
1050 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1051 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1052
1053 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1054 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1055 first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1056
1057 ** New features in evaluation commands
1058
1059 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
1060 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1061 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1062 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1063 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1064
1065 *** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1066 code when called with a prefix argument.
1067
1068 ** Ispell changes
1069
1070 +++
1071 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1072 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
1073 spell-checks the current buffer.
1074
1075 +++
1076 *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1077 added.
1078
1079 *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1080 correction is made and re-checked.
1081
1082 *** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
1083
1084 *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1085 cases.
1086
1087 *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1088 on syntax errors.
1089
1090 *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1091 end of the buffer.
1092
1093 ** Dired changes
1094
1095 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1096 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1097 is, delete only empty directories.
1098
1099 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1100 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1101 copy directories recursively.
1102
1103 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1104 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1105 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1106
1107 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1108 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1109 directory.
1110
1111 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1112 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1113 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1114 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1115 accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1116
1117 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1118 from ls switches.
1119
1120 *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1121 of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1122 which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1123 source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1124
1125 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1126 use the -f option when sending mail.
1127
1128 ** CC mode changes.
1129
1130 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1131 current user setups (although it's believed that these
1132 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1133 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1134 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1135 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1136 release.
1137
1138 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1139 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1140 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1141 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1142 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1143 have to bother.
1144
1145 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1146 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
1147 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
1148 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1149 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1150 by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1151
1152 *** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1153 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1154 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1155 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1156 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1157 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1158 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1159 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1160
1161 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1162 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1163 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1164 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1165 above.
1166
1167 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1168 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1169 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1170 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1171 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1172 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1173 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1174 function documentation for more info.
1175
1176 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1177 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1178 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1179 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1180 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1181 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1182 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1183 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1184
1185 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1186
1187 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1188 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1189
1190 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1191 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1192 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1193 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1194 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1195 style system.
1196
1197 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1198 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1199 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1200 as far as possible.
1201
1202 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1203 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1204 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1205 chapter about this in the manual.
1206
1207 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1208 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1209 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1210 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1211 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1212
1213 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1214 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1215 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1216
1217 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1218 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1219
1220 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1221 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1222 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1223 inside CC Mode.
1224
1225 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1226 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1227 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1228 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1229 cc-mode/).
1230
1231 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1232 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1233 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1234 literals.
1235
1236 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1237 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1238 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1239 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1240 this function.
1241
1242 *** Fixes to IDL mode.
1243 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1244 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1245 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1246 Thanks to Eric Eide.
1247
1248 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1249 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1250 opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1251
1252 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1253
1254 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1255 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1256 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1257 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1258
1259 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1260 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1261 the column specified by comment-column.
1262
1263 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1264 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1265 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1266 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1267 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1268 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1269
1270 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1271 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1272 arguments.
1273
1274 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1275
1276 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1277 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1278 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1279 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1280 Provan).
1281
1282 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1283
1284 ** Makefile mode changes
1285
1286 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1287
1288 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
1289 Fontlock mode is active.
1290
1291 ** Isearch changes
1292
1293 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1294 so that searches can be resumed.
1295
1296 *** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
1297 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1298 that started the search.
1299
1300 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
1301 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1302
1303 +++
1304 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1305
1306 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
1307 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1308 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1309 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1310 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
1311 `secondary-selection'.
1312
1313 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1314 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1315 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1316 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1317 usual snappy response.
1318
1319 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1320 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1321 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1322 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1323
1324 +++
1325 ** Changes in sort.el
1326
1327 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
1328 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
1329 new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
1330 numeric base.
1331
1332 ** Changes to Ange-ftp
1333
1334 +++
1335 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
1336 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1337 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1338
1339 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1340 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1341
1342 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1343 output ^M at the end of lines.
1344
1345 ** Shell script mode changes.
1346
1347 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1348 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1349 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1350
1351 ** Etags changes.
1352
1353 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1354
1355 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
1356 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1357 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1358 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1359 a regular expression. The manual contains details.
1360
1361 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1362 declarations when given the --declarations option.
1363
1364 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
1365 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
1366
1367 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1368 types.
1369
1370 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
1371
1372 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1373
1374 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1375 are now tagged.
1376
1377 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1378 variables are tagged.
1379
1380 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1381
1382 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1383 for PSWrap.
1384
1385 +++
1386 ** Changes in etags.el
1387
1388 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1389 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1390 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1391
1392 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1393 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1394
1395 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1396 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1397 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1398 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1399
1400 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1401
1402 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1403 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1404
1405 A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1406
1407 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1408 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1409 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1410
1411 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1412 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1413
1414 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1415 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1416
1417 +++
1418 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1419 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1420 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1421
1422 +++
1423 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1424 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
1425 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
1426 GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
1427 8859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1428 releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1429 (only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
1430
1431 +++
1432 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
1433 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1434 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1435
1436 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1437
1438 +++
1439 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1440
1441 +++
1442 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
1443 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1444 expression from that list, are not checked.
1445
1446 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1447 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1448 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1449 the buffer, just like for the local files.
1450
1451 ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1452
1453 +++
1454 ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1455 displays local abbrevs, only.
1456
1457 ** VC Changes
1458
1459 VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1460 easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1461 Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1462 to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1463 changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1464 `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1465 version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1466 each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1467 file is registered in that backend.
1468
1469 When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1470 backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1471 directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1472 master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1473 the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1474 As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1475
1476 The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1477 still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1478 RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1479 vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1480 where it doesn't make sense.)
1481
1482 The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1483 obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1484 `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1485
1486 *** General Changes
1487
1488 The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1489 checks are always done now.
1490
1491 VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
1492 operations.
1493
1494 `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1495 `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1496 `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1497
1498 The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1499 first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1500 current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1501 the working file (``merge news'').
1502
1503 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1504 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1505 downwards.
1506
1507 *** Multiple Backends
1508
1509 VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1510 useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1511 repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1512 commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1513 local RCS archives.
1514
1515 To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1516 should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1517 backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1518 `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1519
1520 If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1521 it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1522 Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1523 by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1524 backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1525 VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1526 happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1527 from the more remote backend.
1528
1529 If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1530 another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1531 any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1532 pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1533
1534 After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1535 changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1536 local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1537 buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1538
1539 *** Changes for CVS
1540
1541 There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1542 default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1543 remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1544 by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1545 regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1546 that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1547 queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1548
1549 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1550 repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1551 revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1552 any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1553 backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1554 number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1555 (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1556 of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1557 the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
1558 automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1559 since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1560 name.)
1561
1562 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1563 repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1564 If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1565 commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
1566 current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1567 entire directory tree.
1568
1569 The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1570 "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1571 is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1572 "watched" by other developers.)
1573
1574 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1575 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1576 an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1577 starting at the given directory.
1578
1579 *** Lisp Changes in VC
1580
1581 VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1582 add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1583 library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1584 then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1585 a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1586 provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1587 of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1588 you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1589 `FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1590
1591 ** New modes and packages
1592
1593 *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1594 rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1595 shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1596
1597 Features are:
1598
1599 - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1600 drawn, like this: | \ /
1601 --+-- X
1602 | / \
1603
1604 - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1605 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1606 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1607 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1608 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1609 you are drawing.
1610
1611 - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1612 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1613
1614 - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1615 flood-filling.
1616
1617 - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1618 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1619 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1620 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
1621
1622 - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1623 also do without the mouse.
1624
1625 - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1626 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1627 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1628 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1629 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1630
1631 - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1632
1633 lines straight-lines
1634 rectangles squares
1635 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1636 ellipses circles
1637 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1638 spray-can setting size for spraying
1639 vaporize line vaporize lines
1640 erase characters erase rectangles
1641
1642 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1643 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1644 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1645 drawing.
1646
1647 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1648 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1649 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1650 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1651
1652 - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1653 can be turned off).
1654
1655 +++
1656 *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1657 implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1658 It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1659 functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1660 history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1661 will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1662 the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1663 rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1664 all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1665
1666 +++
1667 *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1668 intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1669 typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1670 on certain projects.
1671
1672 +++
1673 *** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
1674 regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
1675
1676 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
1677
1678 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1679 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1680 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1681 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1682 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1683 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1684 corresponding file is read.
1685
1686 +++
1687 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
1688 Emacs is idle.
1689
1690 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1691 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1692
1693 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1694 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1695 be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1696 `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1697 comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
1698
1699 +++
1700 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1701 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1702 separate Texinfo file.
1703
1704 +++
1705 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1706 by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1707 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1708 `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1709 enter checkin log messages.
1710
1711 +++
1712 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1713 without invoking external programs.
1714
1715 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1716 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1717 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1718 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
1719 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
1720
1721 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1722 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1723
1724 +++
1725 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1726 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1727
1728 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1729 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1730 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1731 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1732 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1733 single step.
1734
1735 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1736 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1737 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1738 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1739
1740 +++
1741 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1742 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1743 actually modifying content of a buffer.
1744
1745 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1746 PostScript.
1747
1748 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1749
1750 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1751
1752 ; comment (until end of line)
1753 A non-terminal
1754 "C" terminal
1755 ?C? special
1756 $A default non-terminal
1757 $"C" default terminal
1758 $?C? default special
1759 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1760 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1761 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1762 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1763 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1764 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1765 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1766 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1767 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1768 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1769 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1770 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1771 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1772 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1773 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1774
1775 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1776
1777 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1778 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1779 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1780 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1781 equal signs of assignments.
1782
1783 +++
1784 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1785 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1786
1787 +++
1788 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1789 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1790 buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1791 customize the package.
1792
1793 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1794
1795 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1796 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1797 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1798 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1799 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1800 which answers different needs.
1801
1802 +++
1803 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1804 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1805 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1806 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1807 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1808 to be enabled.
1809
1810 +++
1811 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1812 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1813
1814 +++
1815 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1816
1817 +++
1818 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1819
1820 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1821
1822 Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1823 `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1824 disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1825 `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1826 displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1827 and background colors.
1828
1829 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1830 Pascal) language.
1831
1832 +++
1833 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1834 the text at point.
1835
1836 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1837
1838 +++
1839 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1840
1841 *** whitespace.el ???
1842
1843 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1844 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1845 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1846 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1847 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1848 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1849 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1850
1851 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1852
1853 Here is an example of columns:
1854
1855 horse apple bus
1856 dog pineapple car EXTRA
1857 porcupine strawberry airplane
1858
1859 Doing the following settings:
1860
1861 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1862 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1863 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1864 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1865
1866
1867 Selecting the lines above and typing:
1868
1869 M-x delimit-columns-region
1870
1871 It results:
1872
1873 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
1874 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1875 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1876
1877 delim-col has the following options:
1878
1879 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1880 before all columns.
1881
1882 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1883 between each column.
1884
1885 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1886 after all columns.
1887
1888 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1889 each column.
1890
1891 delim-col has the following commands:
1892
1893 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1894 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1895
1896 +++
1897 *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1898 were operated on recently.
1899
1900 M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
1901
1902 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1903 recentf at Emacs startup.
1904
1905 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1906 filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1907 file list can be displayed:
1908
1909 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1910 - sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1911 - showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
1912
1913 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1914 dynamically change the menu appearance.
1915
1916 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1917 text.
1918
1919 +++
1920 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
1921 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1922 specific to Message mode.
1923
1924 +++
1925 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1926 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1927 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1928
1929 +++
1930 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1931 interface to access directory servers using different directory
1932 protocols. It has a separate manual.
1933
1934 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1935 for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1936
1937 +++
1938 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1939
1940 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1941 minibuffer with completion.
1942
1943 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1944 with the diary features.
1945
1946 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1947 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1948
1949 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1950 Fill mode.
1951
1952 *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1953 Gnus facilities.
1954
1955 *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
1956 facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
1957 difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
1958 they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
1959
1960 +++
1961 ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
1962 paragraphs filled as you modify them.
1963
1964 +++
1965 ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
1966 to be visited as images.
1967
1968 ** Withdrawn packages
1969
1970 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1971 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
1972
1973 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1974
1975 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
1976
1977 \f
1978 * Incompatible Lisp changes
1979
1980 There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
1981 may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
1982
1983 ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
1984 `(format %s foo)' no longer works to remove properties.
1985
1986 ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
1987 which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
1988 may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
1989 these properties are active.
1990
1991 ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
1992 ranges may affect some code.
1993
1994 ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
1995 buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
1996 make a difference to some code.
1997
1998 ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
1999 operates on the minibuffer.
2000
2001 \f
2002 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2003 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2004
2005 +++
2006 ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2007 alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2008
2009 ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum",
2010 currently using the `md5sum' program.
2011
2012 +++
2013 ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2014 deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2015 being deleted.
2016
2017 +++
2018 ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2019
2020 +++
2021 ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
2022 If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2023 skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2024 with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2025 C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2026 charset.
2027
2028 +++
2029 ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2030 the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2031 message.
2032
2033 ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2034 expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2035
2036 +++
2037 ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2038 with the more general `:mask' property.
2039
2040 +++
2041 ** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
2042
2043 ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2044 backslash.
2045
2046 +++
2047 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2048 is running in batch mode. For example,
2049
2050 (message "%s" (read t))
2051
2052 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2053 to standard output.
2054
2055 +++
2056 ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2057 `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2058
2059 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2060 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2061 frame or window.
2062
2063 +++
2064 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2065 were added
2066
2067 - Function: remove ELT SEQ
2068
2069 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2070 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2071
2072 - Function: remq ELT LIST
2073
2074 Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2075 comparison is done with `eq'.
2076
2077 +++
2078 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
2079
2080 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2081 has been changed.
2082
2083 +++
2084 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2085 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2086 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2087
2088 +++
2089 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2090 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
2091
2092 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2093 function was declared obsolete.
2094
2095 +++
2096 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
2097 retained as an alias).
2098
2099 ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2100 It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2101 is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2102
2103 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2104
2105 - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2106
2107 Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2108 omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2109 the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2110 even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2111 minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2112 means never include the minibuffer window.
2113
2114 ** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2115
2116 - Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2117
2118 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2119
2120 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2121 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2122 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2123 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2124 returned.
2125
2126 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2127 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2128 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2129 minibuffer even if it is active.
2130
2131 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2132 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2133 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2134 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2135 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2136 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2137
2138 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2139 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2140 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2141 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2142 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2143 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2144 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2145
2146 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2147 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2148 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
2149
2150 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2151 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
2152 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2153 Default value is nil.
2154
2155 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
2156 meaning no limit.
2157
2158 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
2159 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2160 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2161
2162 +++
2163 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2164 list of a primitive.
2165
2166 ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2167
2168 +++
2169 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2170 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2171 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2172 than replacing the local map.
2173
2174 ** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2175 after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
2176
2177 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2178
2179 +++
2180 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2181 as promised long ago.
2182
2183 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
2184 \f
2185 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2186
2187 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2188 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2189 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2190 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2191
2192 *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2193 buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2194 the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2195 restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2196
2197 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2198 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2199 when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2200 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2201
2202 *** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2203 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2204 contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2205
2206 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2207 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2208 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2209 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2210 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2211 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2212 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2213 eight-bit-graphic.
2214
2215 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2216
2217 A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2218 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2219 character set as previously.
2220
2221 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2222 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2223 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2224
2225 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2226 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2227 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2228 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2229
2230 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2231 name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2232
2233 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2234 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2235 "fontset-default".
2236
2237 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2238 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2239
2240 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2241 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2242 buffers and strings.
2243
2244 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2245 character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2246 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2247 have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2248 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2249 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2250 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2251 also been deleted.
2252
2253 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2254 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2255 `reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2256
2257 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2258 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2259 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2260 may differ between buffer and string text.
2261
2262 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2263 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2264
2265 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2266 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2267 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2268 `composition' from STRING.
2269
2270 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2271 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2272
2273 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2274 obsolete.
2275
2276 ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
2277 `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
2278 for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
2279 U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
2280
2281 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2282 `japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2283 X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2284
2285 +++
2286 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2287 are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
2288 0xA0..0xFF respectively.
2289
2290 +++
2291 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2292 that offset in the file before writing.
2293
2294 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2295 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
2296
2297 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2298 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2299 from which the command was issued.
2300
2301 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2302 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2303 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2304 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2305 operate on.
2306
2307 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2308 to `window-buffer-height'.
2309
2310 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2311
2312 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2313 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2314 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2315
2316 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2317 respectively.
2318
2319 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2320 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2321
2322 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2323 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2324 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2325
2326 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2327 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2328 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2329 is currently displayed in some window.
2330
2331 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2332 argument function's results.
2333
2334 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2335 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2336
2337 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
2338 header in the list of headers passed to it.
2339
2340 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2341 ignores differences in case and text representation.
2342
2343 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
2344 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2345 as follows:
2346
2347 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2348 nil don't display a cursor
2349 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2350 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2351 others display a box cursor.
2352
2353 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2354 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2355 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2356 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2357
2358 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
2359 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
2360 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2361 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2362
2363 Example:
2364
2365 (string-to-syntax "()")
2366 => (4 . 41)
2367
2368 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2369 other than 10.
2370
2371 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2372 INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2373
2374 #b1111
2375 => 15
2376 #b-1111
2377 => -15
2378
2379 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2380
2381 #o666
2382 => 438
2383
2384 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2385
2386 #xbeef
2387 => 48815
2388
2389 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2390
2391 #2R-111
2392 => -7
2393 #25rah
2394 => 267
2395
2396 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
2397 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
2398 and isn't a string.
2399
2400 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2401 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2402 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2403 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2404
2405 +++
2406 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2407
2408 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
2409 for a regexp in a string.
2410
2411 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2412 `mouse-position-function'.
2413
2414 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2415 that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2416
2417 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2418 Keywords are now always considered constants.
2419
2420 +++
2421 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2422 returns it.
2423
2424 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2425 returned by function `recent-keys'.
2426
2427 +++
2428 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2429 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2430 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2431 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2432 mode.
2433
2434 +++
2435 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2436 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2437
2438 +++
2439 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2440 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2441 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2442 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2443 been performed."
2444
2445 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2446 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2447 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2448 then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
2449
2450 +++
2451 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2452 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2453 and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2454
2455 +++
2456 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2457 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2458 specified table.
2459
2460 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2461
2462 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
2463 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2464 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2465 what BODY returns.
2466
2467 +++
2468 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
2469 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
2470 Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2471 corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2472 Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
2473
2474 +++
2475 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2476 removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2477
2478 +++
2479 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2480 instead of being optional.
2481
2482 +++
2483 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2484 modify read-only text.
2485
2486 +++
2487 ** New functions and variables for locales.
2488
2489 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2490 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
2491 time functions like strftime. The new variables
2492 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2493 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
2494
2495 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2496 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2497 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
2498 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2499 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2500 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2501 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
2502
2503 +++
2504 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2505 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2506 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2507 start sequences.
2508
2509 +++
2510 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2511 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2512
2513 +++
2514 ** New function `propertize'
2515
2516 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2517 strings with text properties.
2518
2519 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2520
2521 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2522 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2523 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2524 specified value of that property. Example:
2525
2526 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2527
2528 +++
2529 ** push and pop macros.
2530
2531 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2532 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
2533 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2534
2535 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2536 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2537 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2538
2539 ** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2540
2541 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2542 are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
2543
2544 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2545 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2546 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2547 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2548
2549 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2550 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2551 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2552 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2553
2554 +++
2555 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2556 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2557
2558 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2559 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2560 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2561 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
2562 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2563 space, and DEL.
2564 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2565 and DEL.
2566 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2567 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2568 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2569 [:alpha:] matches letters.
2570 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2571 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2572 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2573 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2574 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2575 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
2576 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2577 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2578 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2579 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2580 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2581
2582 +++
2583 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2584
2585 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2586
2587 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2588
2589 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2590 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2591
2592 :test TEST
2593
2594 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2595 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2596 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2597
2598 :size SIZE
2599
2600 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2601 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2602
2603 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2604
2605 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2606 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2607 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
2608 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2609 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2610
2611 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2612
2613 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2614 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2615 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2616
2617 :weakness WEAK
2618
2619 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2620 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2621 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2622 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2623 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
2624
2625 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
2626
2627 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2628
2629 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2630
2631 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2632
2633 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2634
2635 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2636 values are shared.
2637
2638 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2639
2640 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2641
2642 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2643
2644 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2645
2646 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2647
2648 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2649
2650 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2651
2652 Returns the size of TABLE.
2653
2654 - Function: hash-table-test TABLE
2655
2656 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2657
2658 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2659
2660 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2661
2662 - Function: clrhash TABLE
2663
2664 Clear TABLE.
2665
2666 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2667
2668 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2669 not found.
2670
2671 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
2672
2673 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2674 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2675
2676 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2677
2678 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2679
2680 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2681
2682 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2683 arguments KEY and VALUE.
2684
2685 - Function: sxhash OBJ
2686
2687 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2688
2689 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2690
2691 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2692 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
2693 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
2694 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2695 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2696
2697 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2698
2699 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2700 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2701 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2702
2703 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2704 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2705
2706 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2707 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2708
2709 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2710 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2711
2712 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
2713 'case-fold-string-hash))
2714
2715 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2716
2717 +++
2718 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2719
2720 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2721 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2722 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2723
2724 +++
2725 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2726
2727 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2728 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2729
2730 +++
2731 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2732 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2733 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2734 is too short to reach that column.
2735
2736 +++
2737 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2738 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2739 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2740 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2741
2742 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2743 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2744 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2745
2746 +++
2747 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2748 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2749
2750 +++
2751 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2752 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2753
2754 +++
2755 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2756 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2757 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2758 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2759 temporary-file-directory instead.
2760
2761 +++
2762 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2763 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2764 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2765 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2766
2767 +++
2768 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2769 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2770
2771 +++
2772 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2773
2774 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2775 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2776 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2777
2778 +++
2779 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2780
2781 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2782 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2783 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2784 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2785 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2786 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2787
2788 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2789 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2790 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2791 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2792
2793 +++
2794 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2795
2796 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2797 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2798 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2799 result string.
2800
2801 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2802 string where arguments appear in the result string.
2803
2804 Example:
2805
2806 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2807 (s2 "world"))
2808 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2809 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
2810 (format s1 s2))
2811
2812 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2813
2814 +++
2815 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2816
2817 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2818 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2819 argument in it.
2820
2821 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2822 (arg "world"))
2823 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2824 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2825 (message msg arg))
2826
2827 +++
2828 ** Sound support
2829
2830 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2831 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2832
2833 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2834 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2835 to enable sound support.
2836
2837 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2838 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2839 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2840 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2841 sound to play, before playing the sound.
2842
2843 The following sound properties are supported:
2844
2845 - `:file FILE'
2846
2847 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2848 searched relative to `data-directory'.
2849
2850 - `:data DATA'
2851
2852 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2853 may be present, but not both.
2854
2855 - `:volume VOLUME'
2856
2857 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
2858 0..1. This property is optional.
2859
2860 - `:device DEVICE'
2861
2862 DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
2863 sound. The default device is system-dependent.
2864
2865 Other properties are ignored.
2866
2867 An alternative interface is called as
2868 (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
2869
2870 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
2871
2872 +++
2873 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2874 a keyword symbol.
2875
2876 ** Changes to garbage collection
2877
2878 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2879 of live and free strings.
2880
2881 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2882 strings that have been consed so far.
2883
2884 \f
2885 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2886 Lisp Manual
2887
2888 +++
2889 ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2890 mini-windows.
2891
2892 +++
2893 ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third argument, FULLY.
2894 If FULLY is non-nil, then locations that are partially obscured aren't
2895 considered visible.
2896
2897 ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
2898
2899 +++
2900 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2901
2902 +++
2903 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2904 image.
2905
2906 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2907
2908 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2909
2910 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2911 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2912 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2913 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2914 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2915
2916 +++
2917 ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2918 has a mask bitmap.
2919
2920 - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2921
2922 Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2923 FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2924 or omitted means use the selected frame.
2925
2926 +++
2927 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2928 satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2929
2930 +++
2931 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2932 optional.
2933
2934 +++
2935 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2936 below).
2937
2938 \f
2939 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2940
2941 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2942 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2943 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2944 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2945
2946 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2947 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2948
2949 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2950 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2951 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2952 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2953 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2954 just display it black instead.
2955
2956 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2957 a line like
2958
2959 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2960
2961 in your `.emacs'.
2962
2963 ** New face implementation.
2964
2965 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2966 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2967
2968 +++
2969 *** New faces.
2970
2971 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2972
2973 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
2974
2975 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2976 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
2977
2978 3. Font height in 1/10pt
2979
2980 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
2981
2982 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
2983
2984 6. Foreground color.
2985
2986 7. Background color.
2987
2988 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2989
2990 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2991
2992 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2993
2994 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2995
2996 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2997 color.
2998
2999 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3000 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3001
3002 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3003 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3004 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3005 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3006 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
3007 attributes mentioned above.
3008
3009 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3010 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3011 created frames.
3012
3013 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3014 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3015 `fully-specified'.
3016
3017 +++
3018 *** Face merging.
3019
3020 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3021 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3022 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3023 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3024 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3025 results in a fully-specified face.
3026
3027 +++
3028 *** Face realization.
3029
3030 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3031 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3032 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3033 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3034 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3035 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3036
3037 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3038 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3039 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3040 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3041
3042 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3043 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3044 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3045 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3046 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3047
3048 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3049 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
3050 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3051 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3052 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3053 Emacs.
3054
3055 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3056 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3057 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3058 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3059
3060 +++
3061 **** Clearing face caches.
3062
3063 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3064 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3065 unused fonts.
3066
3067 +++
3068 *** Font selection.
3069
3070 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3071 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3072 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3073
3074 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3075 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3076 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3077 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3078 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3079
3080 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3081 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3082 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3083
3084 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3085
3086 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3087 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3088 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3089 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3090 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3091 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3092 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3093
3094 Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3095 alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
3096 doesn't exist. Likewise, `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows to
3097 specify alternative font registry names to try.
3098
3099 +++
3100 **** Scalable fonts
3101
3102 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3103 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3104 servers.
3105
3106 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
3107 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
3108 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3109 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3110 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3111 that list. Example:
3112
3113 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3114
3115 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3116
3117 +++
3118 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3119
3120 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3121
3122 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3123 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3124 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3125
3126 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3127 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3128 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3129 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3130 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3131 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3132 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3133 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3134 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3135 of the face font sort order.
3136
3137 - Function: x-font-family-list
3138
3139 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3140 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3141 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3142 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3143
3144 - Variable: font-list-limit
3145
3146 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3147 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3148 matching font. The default is currently 100.
3149
3150 +++
3151 *** Setting face attributes.
3152
3153 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3154 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3155 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3156 `face-attribute'.
3157
3158 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3159 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3160
3161 The following attributes are recognized:
3162
3163 `:family'
3164
3165 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3166 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3167 and `?' are allowed.
3168
3169 `:width'
3170
3171 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3172 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3173 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3174 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3175
3176 `:height'
3177
3178 VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3179 in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3180 scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3181 height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
3182
3183 `:weight'
3184
3185 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3186 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3187 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3188
3189 `:slant'
3190
3191 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3192 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3193 `reverse-oblique'.
3194
3195 `:foreground', `:background'
3196
3197 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3198
3199 `:underline'
3200
3201 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3202 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3203 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3204 don't underline.
3205
3206 `:overline'
3207
3208 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3209 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3210 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3211 overline.
3212
3213 `:strike-through'
3214
3215 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3216 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3217 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3218 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3219
3220 `:box'
3221
3222 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3223 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3224 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3225 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3226 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3227 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3228 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3229 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3230 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3231 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3232 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3233 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3234 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3235 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3236 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3237 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3238 box.
3239
3240 `:inverse-video'
3241
3242 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3243 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3244
3245 `:stipple'
3246
3247 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3248 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3249 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3250 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3251 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3252 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3253
3254 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3255 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3256
3257 `:font'
3258
3259 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3260 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3261 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3262 versions of Emacs.
3263
3264 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3265 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3266 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3267
3268 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3269 `defface'.
3270
3271 `:inherit'
3272
3273 VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3274 of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3275 like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3276
3277 *** Face attributes and X resources
3278
3279 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3280 from X resources:
3281
3282 Face attribute X resource class
3283 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
3284 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3285 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3286 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3287 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3288 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3289 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3290 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3291 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3292 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3293 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3294 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3295 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3296 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
3297 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
3298 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3299 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3300 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3301 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3302 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3303
3304 +++
3305 *** Text property `face'.
3306
3307 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3308 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3309 specification can be
3310
3311 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3312
3313 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3314 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3315 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3316 for face attribute names.
3317
3318 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3319 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3320 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3321
3322 +++
3323 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3324
3325 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3326 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3327 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
3328 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
3329 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
3330 used to clear the mapping table.
3331
3332 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3333
3334 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3335 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3336 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3337 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3338 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3339 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3340 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3341 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3342 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3343 modify their color-related behavior.
3344
3345 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3346 any frame type.
3347
3348 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3349
3350 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3351 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3352 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3353 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3354 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3355 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3356 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3357 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3358 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3359
3360 +++
3361 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
3362
3363 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3364 To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3365 the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3366 `Inviolable' option.
3367
3368 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3369 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3370 Otherwise, it returns zero.
3371
3372 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3373
3374 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3375 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
3376 property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
3377
3378 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
3379 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
3380 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
3381 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
3382 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3383 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3384 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3385 functions.
3386
3387 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
3388 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
3389 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
3390
3391 The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3392
3393 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
3394
3395 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
3396
3397 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3398 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3399 constrained position if that is is different.
3400
3401 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3402 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3403 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
3404 constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
3405 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3406 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
3407 fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3408 the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3409 also considered to be `on the boundary'.
3410
3411 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3412 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3413 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3414 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3415 only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3416
3417 If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3418 a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3419
3420 Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3421
3422 - Function: delete-field &optional POS
3423
3424 Delete the field surrounding POS.
3425 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3426 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3427
3428 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3429
3430 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3431 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3432 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3433 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
3434 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3435
3436 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3437
3438 Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3439 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3440 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3441 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
3442 then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3443
3444 - Function: field-string &optional POS
3445
3446 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3447 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3448 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3449
3450 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3451
3452 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3453 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3454 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3455
3456 +++
3457 ** Image support.
3458
3459 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3460 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3461 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3462 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3463
3464 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3465 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3466 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3467 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3468 area.
3469
3470 IMAGE is an image specification.
3471
3472 *** Image specifications
3473
3474 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3475 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3476 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
3477 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3478 described below are ignored.
3479
3480 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3481
3482 `:ascent ASCENT'
3483
3484 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3485 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
3486 to use for its ascent.
3487
3488 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3489 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3490
3491 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
3492 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3493 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3494 overlays that apply to the image.
3495
3496 `:margin MARGIN'
3497
3498 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
3499 margin around the image. Default is 0.
3500
3501 `:relief RELIEF'
3502
3503 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3504 around an image.
3505
3506 `:algorithm ALGO'
3507
3508 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3509
3510 ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3511 edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3512
3513 ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3514 apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3515 nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3516 position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3517 around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3518 neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3519 transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3520 x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3521 below.
3522
3523 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3524 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3525 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3526
3527 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3528 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3529 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3530 of the factors' absolute values.
3531
3532 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
3533
3534 (1 0 0
3535 0 0 0
3536 9 9 -1)
3537
3538 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3539
3540 ( 2 -1 0
3541 -1 0 1
3542 0 1 -2)
3543
3544 ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3545 ``disabled''.
3546
3547 `:mask MASK'
3548
3549 If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3550 the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3551 image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3552 background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3553 image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3554 the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3555 GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3556 image.
3557
3558 If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3559 in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3560 `:mask nil'.
3561
3562 `:file FILE'
3563
3564 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3565 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3566 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3567 may be present in the image specification.
3568
3569 `:data DATA'
3570
3571 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3572 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3573 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3574 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3575
3576 *** Supported image types
3577
3578 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
3579
3580 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3581 properties supported are
3582
3583 `:foreground FG'
3584
3585 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3586 is the frame's foreground.
3587
3588 `:background BG'
3589
3590 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3591 the frame's background color.
3592
3593 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3594 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3595 instead of a `:file' property.
3596
3597 `:width WIDTH'
3598
3599 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3600
3601 `:height HEIGHT'
3602
3603 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3604
3605 `:data DATA'
3606
3607 DATA must be either
3608
3609 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3610 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3611
3612 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3613
3614 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3615 bitmap.
3616
3617 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3618 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3619 in the file.
3620
3621 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
3622
3623 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3624 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3625 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3626 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3627
3628 Additional image properties supported are:
3629
3630 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3631
3632 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3633 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3634 name.
3635
3636 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3637 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3638
3639 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3640 to display compressed images.
3641
3642 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
3643
3644 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
3645 mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3646 mono images are
3647
3648 `:foreground FG'
3649
3650 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3651 is the frame's foreground.
3652
3653 `:background FG'
3654
3655 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3656 the frame's background color.
3657
3658 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3659
3660 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3661 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3662 are:
3663
3664 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3665
3666 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3667 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3668 properties defined.
3669
3670 **** GIF, image type `gif'
3671
3672 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3673 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3674
3675 Additional image properties supported are:
3676
3677 `:index INDEX'
3678
3679 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3680 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3681
3682 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3683 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3684 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3685 every 0.1 seconds.
3686
3687 (defun show-anim (file max)
3688 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3689 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3690
3691 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3692 (when (= idx max)
3693 (setq idx 0))
3694 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
3695 (save-excursion
3696 (set-buffer buffer)
3697 (goto-char (point-min))
3698 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3699 (insert-image img "x"))
3700 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3701
3702 **** PNG, image type `png'
3703
3704 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3705 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3706 properties defined.
3707
3708 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3709
3710 Additional image properties supported are:
3711
3712 `:pt-width WIDTH'
3713
3714 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
3715 integer. This is a required property.
3716
3717 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
3718
3719 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
3720 must be a integer. This is an required property.
3721
3722 `:bounding-box BOX'
3723
3724 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3725 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3726 files. This is an required property.
3727
3728 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3729 lisp/gs.el.
3730
3731 *** Lisp interface.
3732
3733 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3734 which are supported in the current configuration.
3735
3736 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3737 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3738 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
3739 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3740 images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
3741
3742 *** Simplified image API, image.el
3743
3744 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3745 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3746 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3747 define an image based on available image types. The functions
3748 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3749 buffer.
3750
3751 +++
3752 ** Display margins.
3753
3754 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3755 and images.
3756
3757 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3758 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3759 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3760 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3761 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3762 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3763 of the display margins.
3764
3765 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3766 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3767 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3768 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3769 in this file).
3770
3771 +++
3772 ** Help display
3773
3774 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3775 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3776 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3777 that have a `help-echo' property.
3778
3779 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
3780 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
3781 the window in which the help was found.
3782
3783 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3784 `help-echo' text property was found.
3785
3786 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3787 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3788
3789 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
3790 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
3791 mouse.
3792
3793 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3794 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3795
3796 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3797 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3798 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3799 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3800 used as help string.
3801
3802 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
3803 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3804 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
3805
3806 +++
3807 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3808
3809 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3810 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3811
3812 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3813 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3814 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3815 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3816 used.
3817
3818 (global-set-key [A-down]
3819 #'(lambda ()
3820 (interactive)
3821 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
3822 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
3823 (global-set-key [A-up]
3824 #'(lambda ()
3825 (interactive)
3826 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
3827 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3828
3829 +++
3830 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3831
3832 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3833 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3834 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3835 is called with one argument, POS.
3836
3837 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3838 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3839 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3840 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3841 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3842
3843 +++
3844 ** Tool bar support.
3845
3846 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3847 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3848 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3849 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3850 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3851 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3852
3853 *** Tool bar item definitions
3854
3855 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3856 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3857 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
3858
3859 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3860 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3861 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3862 property (see below).
3863
3864 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3865 binding are currently ignored.
3866
3867 The following properties are recognized:
3868
3869 `:enable FORM'.
3870
3871 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3872 or disabled.
3873
3874 `:visible FORM'
3875
3876 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
3877
3878 `:filter FUNCTION'
3879
3880 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3881 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3882 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
3883
3884 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3885
3886 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3887 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
3888
3889 `:image IMAGES'
3890
3891 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3892 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3893 meaning of each of the four elements:
3894
3895 Index Use when item is
3896 ----------------------------------------
3897 0 enabled and selected
3898 1 enabled and deselected
3899 2 disabled and selected
3900 3 disabled and deselected
3901
3902 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3903 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3904
3905 `:help HELP-STRING'.
3906
3907 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3908 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3909
3910 The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
3911 toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3912 to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3913 menu bar.
3914
3915 The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
3916 dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
3917 buffer-locally to override the global map.
3918
3919 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
3920
3921 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3922 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3923 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3924
3925 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
3926 raised when the mouse moves over them.
3927
3928 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3929 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3930 pixels. Default is 1.
3931
3932 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3933 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3934
3935 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3936
3937 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
3938 a tool bar item. If
3939
3940 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3941 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3942 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3943
3944 is the original tool bar item definition, then
3945
3946 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3947
3948 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3949 item.
3950
3951 ** Mode line changes.
3952
3953 +++
3954 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3955
3956 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3957 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3958 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3959
3960 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3961 a `local-map' text property.
3962
3963 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3964 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3965
3966 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3967 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3968 `local-map' property.
3969
3970 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3971 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3972 example.
3973
3974 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3975 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3976
3977 +++
3978 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3979 variable mode-line-format to nil.
3980
3981 +++
3982 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3983
3984 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3985 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3986 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3987 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3988 line.
3989
3990 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3991 `header-line'.
3992
3993 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3994 position in the header-line.
3995
3996 +++
3997 ** Text property `display'
3998
3999 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4000 replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4001 also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4002 the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
4003 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4004
4005 *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4006
4007 To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4008 text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4009
4010 If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4011 marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4012 the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4013 is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4014 simpler form STRING as property value.
4015
4016 *** Variable width and height spaces
4017
4018 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4019 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4020 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4021 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4022 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4023 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4024 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4025
4026 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4027 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4028 properties described below.
4029
4030 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4031 characters having the `display' property.
4032
4033 - :width WIDTH
4034
4035 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4036 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4037
4038 - :relative-width FACTOR
4039
4040 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4041 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4042 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4043 width of that character by FACTOR.
4044
4045 - :align-to HPOS
4046
4047 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4048 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4049
4050 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4051
4052 - :height HEIGHT
4053
4054 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4055 normal line height.
4056
4057 - :relative-height FACTOR
4058
4059 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4060 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4061
4062 - :ascent ASCENT
4063
4064 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4065 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4066 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4067 equal to 100.
4068
4069 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4070
4071 *** Images
4072
4073 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4074 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4075 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4076 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4077 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4078 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4079 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4080 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4081 as display specification.
4082
4083 *** Other display properties
4084
4085 - (space-width FACTOR)
4086
4087 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4088 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4089 integer or float.
4090
4091 - (height HEIGHT)
4092
4093 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4094
4095 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4096 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4097 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4098 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4099 a font is available counts as a step.
4100
4101 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4102 as tall as the frame's default font.
4103
4104 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4105 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4106
4107 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4108 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
4109
4110 - (raise FACTOR)
4111
4112 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4113 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4114 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4115 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
4116 `height' subproperty.
4117
4118 *** Conditional display properties
4119
4120 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4121 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4122 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4123 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4124 the text having the `display' property.
4125
4126 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4127 `(:when t SPEC)'.
4128
4129 +++
4130 ** New menu separator types.
4131
4132 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4133 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4134 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4135 to specify other menu separator types.
4136
4137 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4138
4139 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4140 separator occurs.
4141
4142 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4143
4144 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4145
4146 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4147
4148 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4149
4150 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4151
4152 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4153
4154 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4155
4156 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4157
4158 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4159
4160 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4161 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4162
4163 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4164
4165 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4166
4167 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4168
4169 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4170
4171 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4172
4173 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4174
4175 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4176
4177 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4178
4179 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4180
4181 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4182
4183 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4184
4185 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4186
4187 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4188
4189 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4190
4191 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4192 the corresponding single-line separators.
4193
4194 +++
4195 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4196
4197 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4198 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4199 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4200 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4201 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4202 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4203 default foreground is black.
4204
4205 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4206 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4207 `ScrollBarBackground').
4208
4209 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4210 settings for scroll bar colors.
4211
4212 +++
4213 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4214 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4215
4216 ---
4217 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4218 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4219 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4220 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4221 the original window start.
4222
4223 ---
4224 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4225 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4226 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4227
4228 +++
4229 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4230
4231 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4232 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4233 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4234 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4235
4236 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4237 fixed-width and fixed-height.
4238
4239 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4240
4241 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4242 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4243 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4244 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4245 temporarily to nil, for example
4246
4247 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4248 (enlarge-window 10))
4249
4250 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
4251 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
4252
4253 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4254 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4255 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4256 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4257 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4258 support a vertical-bar cursor).
4259
4260
4261 \f
4262 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4263
4264 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4265 input.
4266
4267 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4268
4269 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4270
4271 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4272 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4273 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4274 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4275 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4276
4277 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4278 been added.
4279
4280 \f
4281 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4282
4283 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4284
4285 \f
4286 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4287
4288 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4289 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4290 \f
4291 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
4292
4293 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4294
4295 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4296 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4297 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4298
4299 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4300 is the one that is used.
4301
4302 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4303 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4304 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4305 separate from the command's regular output.
4306 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4307 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4308 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4309 the buffer name.
4310
4311 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4312 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4313 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4314 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4315
4316 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4317 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4318 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4319 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4320
4321 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4322 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4323 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4324 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4325
4326 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4327 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4328 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4329 they never ignore case.
4330
4331 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4332 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4333 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4334 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4335 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4336 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4337 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4338
4339 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4340 the same format that was used in the file before.
4341
4342 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4343 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4344
4345 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4346 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4347 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4348
4349 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4350 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4351 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4352 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4353 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4354 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4355 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4356
4357 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4358 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4359 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4360 format. You can now customize these variables.
4361
4362 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4363 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4364 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4365 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4366
4367 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4368 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4369 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4370
4371 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4372 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4373 doesn't have any effect.
4374
4375 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4376 not one per buffer.
4377
4378 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4379 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4380 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4381
4382 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4383 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4384 `auto-show-mode' command.
4385
4386 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4387 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4388 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4389 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4390 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4391
4392 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4393 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4394
4395 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4396 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4397 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4398
4399 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4400 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4401 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4402 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4403
4404 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4405
4406 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4407 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4408 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4409 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4410 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4411
4412 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4413 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4414
4415 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4416 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4417 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4418 `?' on other systems.
4419
4420 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4421 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4422 Unix.
4423
4424 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4425 current codepage when it starts.
4426
4427 ** Mail changes
4428
4429 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4430 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4431 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4432 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4433 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4434 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4435 latin-1:
4436
4437 MIME-version: 1.0
4438 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4439 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4440
4441 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4442 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4443 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4444 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4445 buffer-file-coding-system.
4446
4447 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4448 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4449 mail.
4450
4451 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4452 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4453 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4454 list of possible coding systems.
4455
4456 ** CC Mode changes
4457
4458 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4459 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4460 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4461 docstring for details.
4462
4463 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4464 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4465 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4466 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4467 lineup functions use this feature currently.
4468
4469 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4470 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4471
4472 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4473 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4474
4475 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4476 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4477 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4478 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4479 anonymous classes.
4480
4481 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4482 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4483
4484 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4485 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4486 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4487 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4488
4489 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4490 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4491 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4492 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4493 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4494
4495 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4496
4497 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4498
4499 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4500 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4501
4502 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4503
4504 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4505 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4506 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4507 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4508 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4509
4510 ** Gnus changes.
4511
4512 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4513 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4514 Gnus manual for the full story.
4515
4516 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4517 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4518 group, which is created automatically.
4519
4520 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4521 values.
4522
4523 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4524
4525 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4526 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4527
4528 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4529 `C-u C-c C-c'.
4530
4531 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4532
4533 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4534 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4535
4536 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4537
4538 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4539 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4540
4541 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4542 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4543
4544 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4545 control over simplification.
4546
4547 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4548
4549 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4550 limit.
4551
4552 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4553
4554 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4555
4556 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4557 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4558 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4559
4560 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4561 `a' forces normal posting method.
4562
4563 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4564 -- `W d'.
4565
4566 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4567 to a non-nil value.
4568
4569 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4570 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4571
4572 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4573 has been added.
4574
4575 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4576
4577 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4578
4579 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4580 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4581
4582 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4583 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4584
4585 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4586
4587 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4588 been added.
4589
4590 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4591 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4592
4593 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4594 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4595
4596 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4597
4598 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4599
4600 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4601
4602 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4603
4604 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4605 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4606 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4607
4608 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4609 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4610 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4611 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4612 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4613
4614 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4615 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4616 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4617 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4618
4619 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4620 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4621 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4622 mismatch.
4623
4624 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
4625
4626 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4627 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4628
4629 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4630 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4631 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4632 removed from the label.
4633
4634 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4635 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4636
4637 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4638 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4639
4640 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4641 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4642 expressions.
4643
4644 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4645
4646 ** New/deleted modes and packages
4647
4648 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4649 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4650
4651 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4652 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4653 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4654
4655 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4656 changes with a special face.
4657
4658 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4659 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4660 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4661 \f
4662 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4663
4664 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4665 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4666 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4667 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4668 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4669
4670 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4671 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4672 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4673
4674 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4675 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4676 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4677 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4678 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4679 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4680 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4681 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4682 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4683
4684 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4685 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4686 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4687 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4688 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4689 program.
4690
4691 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4692 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4693 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4694 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4695 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4696 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4697
4698 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4699 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4700 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4701 was not documented clearly before.
4702
4703 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4704 This includes Tetris and Snake.
4705 \f
4706 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4707
4708 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4709 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4710 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4711 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4712
4713 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4714 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4715 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4716
4717 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4718
4719 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4720 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4721
4722 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4723 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4724 integers.
4725
4726 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4727 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4728 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4729 file names and attributes are returned.
4730
4731 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4732 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4733 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4734 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4735 returns the result.
4736
4737 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4738 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4739
4740 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
4741
4742 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4743 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4744 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4745 optionally.
4746
4747 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4748 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4749
4750 **
4751 The new function process-running-child-p
4752 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4753 terminal to its own child process.
4754
4755 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4756 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4757 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4758 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4759
4760 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4761 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4762
4763 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4764 :included is an alias for :visible.
4765
4766 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4767 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4768 to move or copy menu entries.
4769
4770 ** Multibyte editing changes
4771
4772 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4773 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4774 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4775 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4776 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4777 (setq char (sref str idx)
4778 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4779 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4780
4781 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4782 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4783 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4784
4785 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4786 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4787 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4788
4789 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4790
4791 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4792 across the boundary.
4793
4794 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4795 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4796 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4797 contains 8-bit characters.
4798 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4799 contains invalid characters.
4800
4801 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4802 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4803 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4804 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4805 way.
4806
4807 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4808 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4809 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4810 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4811
4812 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4813 compose Thai characters in a string.
4814
4815 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4816 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4817 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4818 menus should always use the third argument.
4819
4820 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4821 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4822 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4823 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4824
4825 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4826 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4827 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4828 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4829
4830 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4831 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4832 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4833 echo area contents.
4834
4835 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4836
4837 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4838 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4839 requested feature cannot be loaded.
4840
4841 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4842 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4843 means to clear out that attribute.
4844
4845 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4846 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4847
4848 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4849 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4850 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4851 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4852
4853 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4854 the gap of the current buffer.
4855
4856 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4857 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4858 current buffer.
4859
4860 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4861 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4862 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4863 it back in after any modifications have been made.
4864 \f
4865 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4866
4867 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4868 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4869 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4870 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4871 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4872
4873 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4874 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4875 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4876 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4877 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4878
4879 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4880 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4881 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4882
4883 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4884 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4885 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4886 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4887 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4888 results.
4889
4890 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4891 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4892 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4893 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4894 \f
4895 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
4896
4897 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4898 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4899 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4900 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4901
4902 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4903 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4904 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4905 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4906 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4907 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4908 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4909 region.
4910
4911 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4912 selective undo.
4913
4914 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4915 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4916 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4917 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4918 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4919
4920 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4921 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4922 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4923 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4924
4925 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4926 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4927 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4928 something that most users not do.
4929
4930 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4931 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4932 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4933 applications.
4934
4935 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4936 pasting operations.
4937
4938 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4939 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4940 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4941 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4942 `ps-printer-name'.
4943
4944 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4945 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4946 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4947 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4948 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4949 hits a new word.
4950
4951 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4952 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4953 to be confused by TeX commands.
4954
4955 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4956 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4957 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4958 of various alternative replacements and actions.
4959
4960 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4961 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4962 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4963 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4964 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4965
4966 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4967 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4968
4969 ** Changes in input method usage.
4970
4971 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4972 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4973 respectively.
4974
4975 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4976
4977 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4978 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4979
4980 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4981 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4982
4983 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4984
4985 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4986
4987 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4988 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4989
4990 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4991 given in the following case:
4992 o When you are using a complex input method.
4993 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4994
4995 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4996 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4997 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4998 setting it to t is helpful.
4999
5000 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5001
5002 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5003 keys:
5004 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5005 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5006 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5007 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5008 environment.
5009
5010 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5011 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5012 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5013 get
5014
5015 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5016
5017 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5018
5019 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5020 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5021
5022 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5023 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5024 its owner and group.
5025
5026 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5027 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5028
5029 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5030 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5031
5032 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5033 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5034 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5035 by the left edge of the rectangle.
5036
5037 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5038 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5039 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5040 for writing keyboard macros.
5041
5042 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5043 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5044 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5045 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5046 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5047 info.
5048
5049 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5050
5051 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5052 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5053 contents only.
5054
5055 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5056 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5057 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5058 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5059
5060 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5061 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5062 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5063
5064 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5065 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5066 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5067 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5068
5069 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5070 failure if the command produces no output.
5071
5072 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5073 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5074 the mouse.
5075
5076 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5077 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5078 function and variable names.
5079
5080 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5081 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5082 file-coding-system-alist.
5083
5084 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5085 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5086 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5087 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5088 according to the current fontset.
5089
5090 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5091
5092 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5093 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5094 nonascii-insert-offset.
5095
5096 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5097 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5098 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5099 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5100
5101 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5102 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5103
5104 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5105 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5106
5107 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5108 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5109 command keys.
5110
5111 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5112 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5113
5114 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5115 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5116 all variables that have documentation.
5117
5118 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5119 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5120 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5121 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5122 it should show; the default is 20.
5123
5124 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5125 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5126 of your input.
5127
5128 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5129 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5130 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5131 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5132 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5133 Newly added options are included as well.
5134
5135 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5136 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5137 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5138
5139 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5140 Customize menu.
5141
5142 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5143 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5144
5145 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5146 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5147 invoked.
5148
5149 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5150 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5151 The default is 1.
5152
5153 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5154 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5155 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5156 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5157 sensibly.
5158
5159 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5160
5161 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5162 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5163 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5164
5165 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5166 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5167 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5168 every night.
5169
5170 ** Desktop changes
5171
5172 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5173 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5174
5175 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5176 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5177
5178 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5179 read and post multi-lingual articles.
5180
5181 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5182 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5183 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5184 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5185 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5186 made invisible again.
5187
5188 ** Mail reading and sending changes
5189
5190 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5191 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5192 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5193 toggle.
5194
5195 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5196 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5197 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5198 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5199 rmail-default-body-file.
5200
5201 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5202 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5203 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5204
5205 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5206 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5207 is evaluated to insert the signature.
5208
5209 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5210 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5211 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5212 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5213 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5214 especially interested in trying feedmail.
5215
5216 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5217 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5218 provided by feedmail are:
5219
5220 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5221 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5222 there is also a queue for draft messages
5223
5224 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5225 be prompted for confirmation
5226
5227 **** does smart filling of address headers
5228
5229 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5230 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5231 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5232
5233 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5234 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5235 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5236 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5237
5238 ** Dired changes
5239
5240 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5241 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5242
5243 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5244 run Dired on the directory name at point.
5245
5246 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5247 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5248 for a specified regexp.
5249
5250 ** VC Changes
5251
5252 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5253 conveniently.
5254
5255 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5256 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5257 Dired.
5258
5259 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5260 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5261 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5262 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5263
5264 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5265 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5266 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5267 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5268 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5269
5270 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5271 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5272 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5273 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5274 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5275
5276 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5277 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5278 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5279 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5280
5281 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5282 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5283 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5284
5285 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5286 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5287 session to resolve them.
5288
5289 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5290 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5291 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5292 uses as well).
5293
5294 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5295 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5296 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5297 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5298 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5299 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5300 using ediff.
5301
5302 ** Changes in Font Lock
5303
5304 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5305 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5306 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5307 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5308 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5309
5310 ** Frame name display changes
5311
5312 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5313 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5314 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5315 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5316
5317 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5318 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5319 menu.
5320
5321 ** Comint (subshell) changes
5322
5323 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5324 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5325 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5326
5327 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5328
5329 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5330 that is, the line after the last line you got.
5331 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5332
5333 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5334 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5335 the following line.
5336
5337 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5338 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5339 previously sent input.
5340
5341 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5342 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5343 as the search string.
5344
5345 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5346 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5347
5348 ** C mode changes
5349
5350 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5351 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5352 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5353 definition.
5354
5355 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5356 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5357 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5358 style is still the default however.
5359
5360 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5361
5362 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5363 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5364 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5365
5366 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5367 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5368
5369 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5370 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5371
5372 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5373 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5374
5375 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5376 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5377
5378 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5379 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5380 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5381 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5382
5383 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
5384
5385 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5386 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5387 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5388
5389 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5390 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5391 expanding dynamically.
5392
5393 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5394 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5395
5396 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5397 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5398 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5399 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5400
5401 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5402
5403 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5404
5405 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5406 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5407 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5408 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5409 against the first word in the title.
5410
5411 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5412 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5413 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5414 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5415 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5416 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5417
5418 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5419 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5420 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5421 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5422
5423 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
5424
5425 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5426 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5427 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5428 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5429 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5430 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5431
5432 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5433 Editing group once the package is loaded.
5434
5435 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5436 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5437 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5438
5439 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5440 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5441
5442 ** Ispell changes.
5443
5444 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5445 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5446 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5447
5448 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
5449 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5450 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5451 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5452 include:
5453
5454 o URLs are automatically skipped
5455 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5456
5457 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5458
5459 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
5460
5461 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5462 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5463 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5464 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5465
5466 *** New recursive parser.
5467
5468 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5469 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5470 recursive parser scans the individual files.
5471
5472 *** Parsing only part of a document.
5473
5474 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5475 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5476 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5477
5478 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5479
5480 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
5481
5482 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5483
5484 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5485
5486 *** Using multiple selection buffers
5487
5488 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5489 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5490
5491 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5492
5493 *** References to external documents.
5494
5495 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5496 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5497 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5498 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5499 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5500 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5501 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5502
5503 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5504
5505 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5506 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5507
5508 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5509 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5510
5511 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5512
5513 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5514 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5515
5516 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5517
5518 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5519 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5520 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5521 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5522 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5523 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5524 more.
5525
5526 *** Support for the varioref package
5527
5528 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5529
5530 *** New hooks
5531
5532 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5533 and citations are created. These hooks are
5534 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5535 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
5536
5537 *** Citations outside LaTeX
5538
5539 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5540 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5541
5542 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
5543
5544 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5545 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5546 fontified, use
5547
5548 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5549
5550 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5551 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5552 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5553 directories that contain the same file name.
5554
5555 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5556 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5557 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5558 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5559 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5560 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5561 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5562 directory.
5563
5564 ** New modes and packages
5565
5566 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5567 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5568 it, but some do not.
5569
5570 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5571 code.
5572
5573 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5574 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5575 around in a buffer.
5576
5577 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5578
5579 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5580 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5581 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5582 established system of notation similar to Chess.
5583
5584 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5585 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5586 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5587
5588 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5589 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5590 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5591 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5592 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5593 the like.
5594
5595 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5596 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5597
5598 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5599 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5600 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5601 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5602
5603 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5604
5605 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5606 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5607 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5608 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5609 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5610 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5611 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5612 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5613 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5614 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5615 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5616
5617 Platform-specific modes:
5618
5619 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5620 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5621 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5622 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5623 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5624 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5625 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5626 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5627 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5628 \f
5629 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5630
5631 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5632 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5633 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5634 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5635
5636 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5637 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5638 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5639
5640 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5641 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5642 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5643 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5644
5645 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5646 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5647 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5648 environment.
5649
5650 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5651 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5652 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5653 current input method for reading this one event.
5654
5655 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5656 now control whether to output certain characters as
5657 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5658 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5659 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5660 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5661 \f
5662 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5663
5664 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5665 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5666
5667 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5668 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5669 always increases point by 1.
5670
5671 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5672 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5673
5674 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5675
5676 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5677 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5678 default value changed. For example,
5679
5680 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5681 :type 'integer
5682 :group 'foo
5683 :version "20.3")
5684
5685 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5686 :version "20.3")
5687
5688 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5689 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5690 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5691 `:version' in the top level group.
5692
5693 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5694
5695 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5696 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5697
5698 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5699 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5700 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5701 to themselves.
5702
5703 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5704 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5705 values whatever.
5706
5707 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
5708 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5709 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5710
5711 ** Frame-local variables.
5712
5713 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5714 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5715 local bindings for that variable.
5716
5717 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5718 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5719 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5720 parameter name.
5721
5722 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5723 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5724 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5725 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5726
5727 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5728 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5729 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5730 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5731
5732 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5733 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5734 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5735 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5736 See the documentation in sregex.el.
5737
5738 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5739 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5740 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5741 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5742
5743 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5744 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5745
5746 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5747 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5748 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5749
5750 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5751 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5752 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5753 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5754
5755 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5756 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5757 empty input.
5758
5759 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5760 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5761 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5762 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5763 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5764
5765 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5766 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5767 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5768 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5769
5770 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5771 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5772 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5773 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5774 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5775
5776 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5777 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5778 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5779 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5780
5781 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5782 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5783 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5784
5785 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5786 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5787 was directed to display this buffer.
5788
5789 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5790 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5791 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5792 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5793 set-window-configuration.
5794
5795 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5796 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5797 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5798 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5799
5800 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5801 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5802 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5803
5804 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5805 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5806 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5807
5808 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5809 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5810
5811 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5812 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5813
5814 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5815 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5816 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5817
5818 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5819 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5820 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5821 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5822
5823 ** Menu changes
5824
5825 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5826 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5827 better supported.
5828
5829 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5830 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5831 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5832 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5833 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5834
5835 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
5836
5837 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5838 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5839 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5840 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5841
5842 The format is:
5843 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5844 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5845 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5846 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5847 The supported properties include
5848
5849 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5850 item is enabled.
5851 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5852 item should appear in the menu.
5853 :filter FILTER-FN
5854 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5855 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5856 It should return a binding to use instead.
5857 :keys DESCRIPTION
5858 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5859 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5860 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5861 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5862 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5863 keyboard binding.
5864 :key-sequence nil
5865 This means that the command normally has no
5866 keyboard equivalent.
5867 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5868 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5869 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5870 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5871 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5872
5873 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5874 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5875
5876 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5877
5878 ** New event types
5879
5880 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5881 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5882 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5883 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5884
5885 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5886
5887 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5888 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5889 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5890 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5891 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5892 forward, away from the user.
5893
5894 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5895
5896 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5897 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5898 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5899 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5900 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5901
5902 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5903
5904 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5905 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5906 that were dragged and dropped.
5907
5908 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5909
5910 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5911
5912 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5913 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5914 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5915
5916 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5917 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5918 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5919
5920 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5921 in Emacs 19 and before.
5922
5923 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5924 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5925
5926 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5927 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5928 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5929 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5930
5931 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5932 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5933 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5934 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5935 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5936
5937 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5938 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5939 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5940 consistent with the new representation.
5941
5942 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5943 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5944 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5945 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5946
5947 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5948 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5949 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5950
5951 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5952 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5953 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5954
5955 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5956 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5957 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5958
5959 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5960 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5961
5962 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5963 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5964
5965 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5966 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5967 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5968 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5969
5970 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5971 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5972
5973 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5974 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5975 buffer or string being searched.
5976
5977 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5978 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5979 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5980 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5981 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5982 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5983 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5984
5985 *** Structure of coding system changed.
5986
5987 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5988 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5989 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5990 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5991 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5992 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5993 define-coding-system-alias.
5994
5995 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5996 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5997 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5998 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5999 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6000 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6001 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6002 `iso-8859-1'.
6003
6004 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6005 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6006 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6007 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6008
6009 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6010 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6011 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6012 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6013
6014 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6015 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6016 This function requires a user interaction.
6017
6018 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6019 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6020 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6021 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6022 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6023 select-safe-coding-system.
6024
6025 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6026 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6027 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6028 was done.
6029
6030 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6031 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6032 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6033
6034 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6035 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6036 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6037 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6038
6039 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6040 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6041 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6042 converted.
6043
6044 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6045 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6046
6047 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6048 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6049 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6050 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6051 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6052 range of characters.
6053
6054 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6055 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6056
6057 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6058 in the current buffer at position POS.
6059
6060 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6061 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6062 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6063 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6064 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6065 binding input-method-function to nil.
6066
6067 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6068 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6069 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6070 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6071 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6072
6073 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6074 subsequent events of a key sequence.
6075
6076 *** You can customize any language environment by using
6077 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6078
6079 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6080 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6081 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6082 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6083 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6084 \f
6085 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
6086
6087 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6088 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6089 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6090 tree structure.
6091
6092 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6093 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6094
6095 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6096 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6097 in your .emacs file.)
6098
6099 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6100 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6101
6102 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6103 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6104
6105 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6106 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6107 kills the region.
6108
6109 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6110 delete the character before point, as usual.
6111
6112 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6113 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6114 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6115
6116 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6117 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6118 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6119 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6120 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6121 past.)
6122
6123 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6124 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6125 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6126 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6127 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6128
6129 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6130 and is an alias for it.
6131
6132 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6133 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6134
6135 ** Scrolling changes
6136
6137 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6138 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6139
6140 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6141 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6142 where it started.
6143
6144 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6145 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6146 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6147 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6148
6149 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6150 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6151 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6152 recenters the window.
6153
6154 ** International character set support (MULE)
6155
6156 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6157 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6158 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6159 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6160 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6161 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6162
6163 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6164 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6165 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6166 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6167 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6168
6169 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6170 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6171 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6172 language, to make it possible to type them.
6173
6174 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6175 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6176
6177 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6178 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6179
6180 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6181
6182 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6183
6184 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6185 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6186 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6187 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6188 characters for their work until they want to change.
6189
6190 *** Input methods
6191
6192 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6193 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6194 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6195 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6196 support several input methods.
6197
6198 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6199 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6200 work.
6201
6202 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6203 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6204 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6205 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6206 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6207 letter.
6208
6209 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6210 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6211 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6212 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6213 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6214
6215 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6216 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6217 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6218 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6219
6220 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6221 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6222 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6223 the first guess is wrong.
6224
6225 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6226 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6227
6228 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6229 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6230 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6231 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6232
6233 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6234 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6235 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6236 translate automatically to and from either one.
6237
6238 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6239
6240 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6241 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6242 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6243 what you want.
6244
6245 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6246 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6247 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6248 multibyte characters in that buffer.
6249
6250 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6251 character conversion as well.
6252
6253 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6254
6255 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6256 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6257 requires using many fonts.
6258
6259 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6260 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6261
6262 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6263 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6264 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6265 you would use a font.
6266
6267 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6268 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6269 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6270
6271 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6272 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6273 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6274 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6275 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6276
6277 *** Defining fontsets.
6278
6279 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6280 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6281 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6282
6283 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6284 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6285 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6286 standard fontset are created automatically.
6287
6288 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6289 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6290 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6291 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6292 name is `fontset-startup'.
6293
6294 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6295 The resource value should have this form:
6296 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6297 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6298 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6299 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6300 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6301 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6302 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6303 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6304 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6305
6306 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6307 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6308 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6309
6310 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6311 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6312 following resource,
6313 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6314 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6315 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6316 Here is the substitution rule:
6317 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6318 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6319 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6320 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6321 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6322
6323 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6324 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6325 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6326
6327 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6328 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6329 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6330 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6331 fontsets.
6332
6333 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6334 defaults for a particular choice of language.
6335
6336 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6337 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6338 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6339 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6340 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6341 system for new files that you create.
6342
6343 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6344 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6345 whole Emacs session.
6346
6347 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6348 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6349 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6350
6351 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6352 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6353 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6354 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6355 coding systems that Emacs supports.
6356
6357 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6358 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6359 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6360 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6361 is used for *the immediately following command*.
6362
6363 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6364 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6365
6366 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6367 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6368
6369 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6370 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6371
6372 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6373 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6374 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6375 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6376 of the file.
6377
6378 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6379 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6380 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6381 translated into that character code.
6382
6383 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6384 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6385
6386 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6387
6388 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6389 the coding system for keyboard input.
6390
6391 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6392 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6393 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6394
6395 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6396
6397 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6398 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6399 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6400 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6401 designed to work with terminals.
6402
6403 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6404 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6405 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6406 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6407 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6408 in the corresponding buffer.
6409
6410 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6411
6412 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6413 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6414 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6415
6416 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6417 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6418 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6419 want to use.
6420
6421 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6422 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6423
6424 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6425 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6426 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6427 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6428
6429 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6430 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6431 related information.
6432
6433 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6434 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6435 scripts.
6436
6437 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6438 information about the support for a particular language.
6439 You specify the language as an argument.
6440
6441 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6442 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6443 first dash.
6444
6445 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6446 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6447 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
6448 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6449
6450 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6451 B big5 (Chinese)
6452 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6453 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6454 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6455 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6456 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6457 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6458 K euc-korea (Korean)
6459 R koi8 (Russian)
6460 Q tibetan
6461 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6462 T lao
6463 T tis620 (Thai)
6464 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6465 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6466 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6467 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6468 z hz (Chinese)
6469
6470 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6471 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6472 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6473 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6474
6475 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6476 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6477
6478 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6479 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6480 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6481 Rmail files themselves.
6482
6483 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6484 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6485
6486 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6487 for sending mail:
6488
6489 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6490 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6491 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6492 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6493 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6494
6495 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6496 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6497 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6498 translations.
6499
6500 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6501 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6502 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6503 without any conversion.
6504
6505 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6506 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6507 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6508 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6509
6510 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6511 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6512
6513 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6514 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6515
6516 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6517 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6518
6519 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6520 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6521 in the buffer before point.
6522
6523 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6524 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6525 you are using.
6526
6527 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6528 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6529
6530 ** File locking works with NFS now.
6531
6532 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6533 in the same directory as FILENAME.
6534
6535 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6536 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6537 can become a bottleneck.
6538
6539 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6540 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6541 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6542 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6543 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6544 so useful that the change is worth while.
6545
6546 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6547 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6548 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6549 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6550
6551 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6552 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6553 show-paren-mode.
6554
6555 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6556 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6557 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6558
6559 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6560 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6561 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6562
6563 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6564 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6565 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6566
6567 ** Changes in View mode.
6568
6569 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6570 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6571
6572 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6573 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6574
6575 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6576 previous state.
6577
6578 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6579 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6580
6581 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6582 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6583 not just the selected window.
6584
6585 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6586 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6587 turns View mode on or off.
6588
6589 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6590 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6591 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6592
6593 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6594 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6595
6596 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6597 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6598 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6599 which version to compare with.
6600
6601 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6602 blocks if a match is inside the block.
6603
6604 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6605 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6606 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6607 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6608
6609 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6610 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6611 blocks, all of them or none.
6612
6613 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6614 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6615 confirmation first.
6616
6617 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6618 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6619 However, the mode will not be changed if
6620 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6621 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6622 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6623 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6624
6625 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6626
6627 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6628 these commands do not change the major mode.
6629
6630 ** M-x occur changes.
6631
6632 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6633 it performs a case-sensitive search.
6634
6635 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6636 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6637 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6638
6639 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6640 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6641 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6642 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6643 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6644
6645 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6646 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6647 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6648 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6649
6650 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6651 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6652 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6653
6654 ** Outline mode changes.
6655
6656 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6657
6658 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6659
6660 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6661 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6662 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6663 was already active.
6664
6665 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6666 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6667 get confused by it.
6668
6669 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6670 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6671
6672 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6673
6674 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6675 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6676 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6677 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6678
6679 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6680 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6681 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6682
6683 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6684 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6685 values.
6686
6687 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6688 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6689 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6690 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6691
6692 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6693 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6694 can be. The default value is 30.
6695
6696 ** Changes in Mail mode.
6697
6698 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6699 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6700 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6701 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6702 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6703 behavior.
6704
6705 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6706 compose-mail-other-frame.
6707
6708 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6709 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6710 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6711 buffer that shows the original message.
6712
6713 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6714 with separator lines around the contents.
6715
6716 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6717 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6718 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6719 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6720
6721 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
6722
6723 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6724 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6725 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6726 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6727
6728 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6729 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6730 /etc/passwd.
6731
6732 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6733 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6734 /etc/passwd.
6735
6736 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6737 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6738 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6739 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6740
6741 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6742 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6743 be taken to be magic.
6744
6745 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6746 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6747 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6748
6749 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6750 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6751
6752 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6753 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6754
6755 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6756
6757 new key dired.el binding old key
6758 ------- ---------------- -------
6759 * c dired-change-marks c
6760 * m dired-mark m
6761 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6762 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6763 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6764 * u dired-unmark u
6765 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6766 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6767 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6768 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6769 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6770 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6771
6772 ** Rmail changes.
6773
6774 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6775 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6776 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6777 each time you run it.
6778
6779 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6780 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6781
6782 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6783 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6784 means to move in the opposite direction.
6785
6786 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6787 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6788
6789 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6790 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6791 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6792 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6793 for output.
6794
6795 ** Gnus changes.
6796
6797 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6798
6799 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6800 Gnus.
6801
6802 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6803 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6804
6805 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6806 article mode line.
6807
6808 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6809
6810 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6811
6812 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6813
6814 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6815 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6816 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6817
6818 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6819
6820 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6821
6822 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6823 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6824
6825 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6826 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6827 used to pick articles.
6828
6829 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6830 another have been added.
6831
6832 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6833
6834 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6835 generating lines in buffers.
6836
6837 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6838 `M-C-_'.
6839
6840 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6841
6842 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6843
6844 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6845
6846 *** Scores can be decayed.
6847
6848 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6849
6850 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6851 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6852
6853 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6854 the native server.
6855
6856 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6857
6858 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
6859 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6860
6861 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6862
6863 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6864 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6865
6866 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6867 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6868
6869 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6870 a group.
6871
6872 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6873 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6874
6875 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6876
6877 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6878
6879 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6880
6881 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6882
6883 Use the `Y c' command.
6884
6885 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6886
6887 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6888
6889 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6890
6891 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6892 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6893
6894 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6895
6896 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6897
6898 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6899 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6900
6901 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6902
6903 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6904 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6905 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6906 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6907 this issue.)
6908
6909 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6910 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6911 particular news group. This can be done by:
6912
6913 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6914
6915 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6916 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6917 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6918 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6919 for reading and posting).
6920
6921 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6922 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6923 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6924 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6925 there.
6926
6927 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6928 default. Here are some of these default settings:
6929
6930 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6931 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6932 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6933 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6934 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6935
6936 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6937 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6938
6939 ** CC mode changes.
6940
6941 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6942 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6943 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6944 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6945 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6946 loaded.
6947
6948 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6949 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6950 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6951 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6952 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6953 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6954
6955 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6956 of the current buffer.
6957
6958 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6959 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6960 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6961
6962 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6963 style that the Python developers like.
6964
6965 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6966 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6967 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6968
6969 ** VC Changes [new]
6970
6971 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6972 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6973 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6974
6975 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6976 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6977 developers.
6978
6979 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6980 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6981
6982 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6983 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6984 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6985 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6986
6987 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6988 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6989
6990 ** Calendar changes.
6991
6992 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6993 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6994 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6995
6996 ** ps-print changes
6997
6998 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6999
7000 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7001
7002 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7003 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7004 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7005 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7006 It defaults to `letter'.
7007 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7008
7009 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7010 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7011 non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7012
7013 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7014 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7015 It defaults to 1.
7016
7017 *** Horizontal layout
7018
7019 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7020 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7021 All are measured in points.
7022
7023 *** Vertical layout
7024
7025 The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7026 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7027 All are measured in points.
7028
7029 *** Headers
7030
7031 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7032 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7033 margin above the text.
7034
7035 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7036 framing box is printed around the header.
7037
7038 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7039 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7040
7041 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7042 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7043 `ps-header-font-size'.
7044
7045 *** Font managing
7046
7047 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7048 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7049 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7050 elements to this alist.
7051
7052 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7053 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7054
7055 ** hideshow changes.
7056
7057 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7058 C++, ; for lisp).
7059
7060 *** Support for java-mode added.
7061
7062 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7063 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7064
7065 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7066 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7067 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7068
7069 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7070 robust and a lot faster.
7071
7072 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7073
7074 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7075 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7076 documentation for more details.
7077
7078 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
7079
7080 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7081 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7082 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7083 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7084 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7085
7086 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7087 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7088 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7089 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7090
7091 ** Font Lock mode
7092
7093 *** Custom support
7094
7095 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7096 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7097 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7098 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7099 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7100 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7101
7102 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7103
7104 *** Maximum decoration
7105
7106 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7107 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7108 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7109 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7110 to get the old behavior.
7111
7112 *** New support
7113
7114 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7115
7116 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7117 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7118
7119 *** Configurable support
7120
7121 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7122 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7123 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7124 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7125 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7126 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7127 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7128
7129 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7130 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7131 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7132
7133 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7134
7135 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7136 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7137 for any mode.
7138
7139 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7140
7141 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7142
7143 in your ~/.emacs.
7144
7145 *** New faces
7146
7147 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7148 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7149 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7150 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7151
7152 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7153
7154 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7155 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7156 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7157
7158 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7159
7160 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7161 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7162 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7163 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7164 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7165 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7166 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7167
7168 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7169 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7170 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7171 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7172 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7173 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7174
7175 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7176
7177 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7178 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7179 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7180 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7181
7182 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7183 settings.
7184
7185 ** Ada mode changes.
7186
7187 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7188 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7189 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7190 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7191 stubs.
7192
7193 *** There are two new commands:
7194 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7195 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7196
7197 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7198 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7199 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7200
7201 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7202 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7203 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7204
7205 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7206 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7207 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7208 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7209
7210 ** Scheme mode changes.
7211
7212 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7213 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7214 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7215 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7216 have any effect.
7217
7218 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7219 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7220 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7221 variables as buffer-local variables.
7222
7223 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7224 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7225
7226 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
7227
7228 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7229 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7230 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7231 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7232
7233 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7234 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7235 buffer in Emacs.
7236
7237 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7238 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7239 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7240 option takes precedence.
7241
7242 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7243 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7244 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7245
7246 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7247 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7248 the current defun.
7249
7250 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7251 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7252
7253 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7254 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7255 necessary).
7256
7257 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7258 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7259 these register values no longer become completely useless.
7260 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7261 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7262 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7263
7264 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7265 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7266 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7267 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7268
7269 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7270 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7271 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7272 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7273 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7274
7275 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7276 since it applies only to the current frame.
7277
7278 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7279 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7280 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7281
7282 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7283 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7284 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7285 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7286 instead of just the file you are editing.
7287
7288 ** RefTeX mode
7289
7290 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7291 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7292 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7293 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7294 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7295
7296 C-c ( reftex-label
7297 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7298 knows which kind of label is needed.
7299
7300 C-c ) reftex-reference
7301 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7302 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7303
7304 C-c [ reftex-citation
7305 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7306 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7307
7308 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7309 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7310
7311 C-c = reftex-toc
7312 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7313 can quickly jump to every section.
7314
7315 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7316 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7317 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7318 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7319 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7320
7321 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7322
7323 *** Info documentation is now available.
7324
7325 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7326 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7327
7328 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7329 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7330
7331 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7332 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7333
7334 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7335 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7336 appropriate functions.
7337
7338 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7339 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7340
7341 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7342 been cleaned.
7343
7344 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7345 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7346
7347 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7348 shall be delimited.
7349
7350 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7351 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7352 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7353
7354 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7355 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7356 prefixed with `ALT'.
7357
7358 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7359 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7360 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7361 documentation).
7362
7363 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7364 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7365 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7366
7367 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7368 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7369
7370 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7371 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7372 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7373
7374 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7375
7376 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7377
7378 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7379 from alien sources.
7380
7381 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7382 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7383 crossref entries.
7384
7385 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7386 region.
7387
7388 *** Added support for imenu.
7389
7390 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7391 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7392 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7393 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7394
7395 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7396 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7397
7398 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7399
7400 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7401
7402 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7403 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7404 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7405 as an argument.
7406
7407 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7408 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7409
7410 ** browse-url changes
7411
7412 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7413 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7414 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7415 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7416 customization variables.
7417
7418 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7419
7420 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7421 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7422 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7423
7424 ** Changes in Ediff
7425
7426 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7427 pops up the Info file for this command.
7428
7429 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7430 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7431 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7432 directories).
7433
7434 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7435 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7436 files in the same directory.
7437
7438 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7439 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7440 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7441
7442 ** Changes in Viper
7443
7444 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7445 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7446 instead of vip-.
7447 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7448 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7449 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7450 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7451 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7452 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7453 color when Viper is in insert state.
7454 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7455 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7456 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7457
7458 ** Etags changes.
7459
7460 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7461 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7462 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7463 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7464 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7465
7466 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7467
7468 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7469 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7470
7471 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7472 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7473 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7474
7475 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7476 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7477 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7478 methods and protocols.
7479
7480 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7481 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7482 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7483 paragraph name.
7484
7485 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7486 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7487 at least M times and as many as N times.
7488
7489 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7490 in files has changed slightly.
7491
7492 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7493 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7494 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7495 with old time-stamp-format values.
7496
7497 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7498 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7499 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7500 reasons.
7501
7502 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7503 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7504 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7505 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7506 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7507 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7508
7509 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7510 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7511 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7512
7513 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7514 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7515 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7516 recommended now will continue to work then.
7517
7518 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7519 details.
7520
7521 ** There are some additional major modes:
7522
7523 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7524 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7525 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7526
7527 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7528 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7529 into Emacs.
7530
7531 ** New Lisp packages include:
7532
7533 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7534
7535 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7536 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7537
7538 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7539
7540 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7541 in shell buffers.
7542
7543 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7544 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7545 and `elint-defun'.
7546
7547 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7548 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7549 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7550 strings or comments.
7551
7552 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7553 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7554 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7555 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7556 at these points.
7557
7558 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7559 can visit them by short forms of their names.
7560
7561 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7562 Emacs Lisp function at point.
7563
7564 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7565
7566 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7567 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7568
7569 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7570
7571 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7572
7573 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7574
7575 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7576 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7577
7578 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7579 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7580 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7581 original place after inserting the copy.
7582
7583 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7584 on the buffer.
7585
7586 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7587 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7588 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7589
7590 Enable mouse-drag with:
7591 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7592 -or-
7593 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7594
7595 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7596 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7597
7598 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7599 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7600
7601 *** ogonek
7602
7603 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7604 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7605 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7606 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7607 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7608 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7609 instance) and vice versa.
7610
7611 To use this package load it using
7612 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7613 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7614 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7615 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7616 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7617 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7618
7619 *** Interface to ph.
7620
7621 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7622
7623 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7624 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7625 these servers.
7626
7627 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7628
7629 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7630 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7631 while the real cursor does not move.
7632
7633 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7634 for visiting your favorite web sites.
7635
7636 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7637 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7638
7639 ** movemail change
7640
7641 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7642 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7643 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7644 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7645
7646 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7647 \f
7648 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7649
7650 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7651
7652 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7653 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7654 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7655 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7656 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7657
7658 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7659 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7660 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7661 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7662 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7663 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7664 \f
7665 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7666
7667 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7668 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7669 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7670 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7671
7672 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7673 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7674
7675 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7676 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7677 "win".
7678
7679 ** Basic Lisp changes
7680
7681 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7682 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7683
7684 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7685 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7686 or by the user.
7687
7688 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7689
7690 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7691
7692 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7693 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7694
7695 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7696 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7697 its argument.
7698
7699 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7700
7701 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7702
7703 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7704
7705 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7706 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7707 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7708 `format' function.
7709
7710 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7711 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7712 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7713
7714 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7715 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7716 adding one of these suffixes.
7717
7718 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7719 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7720 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7721
7722 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7723 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7724
7725 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7726
7727 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7728 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7729
7730 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7731 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7732
7733 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7734
7735 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7736 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7737
7738 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7739 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7740 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7741 works using `save-current-buffer'.
7742
7743 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7744 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7745 of the last form.
7746
7747 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7748 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7749 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7750 as the last form.
7751
7752 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7753 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7754 matches.
7755
7756 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7757
7758 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7759 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7760 Then it returns that string.
7761
7762 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7763
7764 (with-output-to-string
7765 (princ "The buffer is ")
7766 (princ (buffer-name)))
7767
7768 returns "The buffer is foo".
7769
7770 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7771 is non-nil.
7772
7773 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7774 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7775 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7776
7777 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7778 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7779
7780 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7781 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7782 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7783 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7784 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7785 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7786
7787 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7788 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7789 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7790 characters".
7791
7792 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7793 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7794 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7795 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7796 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7797
7798 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7799 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7800 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7801 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7802
7803 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7804 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7805
7806 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7807
7808 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7809 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7810 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7811 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7812 guaranteed.
7813
7814 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7815 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7816 character).
7817
7818 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7819
7820 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7821 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7822 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7823 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7824 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7825
7826 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7827
7828 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7829 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7830 more than the number of characters.
7831
7832 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7833 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7834 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7835 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7836 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7837 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7838
7839 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7840 and returns a string containing those characters.
7841
7842 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7843 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7844 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7845 character, sref signals an error.
7846
7847 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7848 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7849 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7850
7851 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7852 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7853 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7854
7855 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7856 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7857 to a vector of the characters in it.
7858
7859 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7860 of a string. You call it as follows:
7861
7862 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7863
7864 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7865 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7866 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7867 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7868 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7869
7870 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7871 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7872
7873 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7874 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7875
7876 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7877 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7878 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7879 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7880
7881 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7882
7883 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7884
7885 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7886 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7887 are not included in the resulting value.
7888
7889 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7890 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7891 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7892 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7893
7894 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7895 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7896 character extends across that column), then the padding character
7897 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7898 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7899 column START-COLUMN.
7900
7901 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7902 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7903 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7904 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7905 changed text, before the change.
7906
7907 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7908 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7909 one character set for each script, not for each language.
7910
7911 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7912
7913 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7914
7915 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7916 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7917
7918 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7919 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7920 which identify the character within that character set.
7921
7922 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7923 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7924 opposite of split-char.
7925
7926 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7927 of all the characters between BEG and END.
7928
7929 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7930 of all the characters in a string.
7931
7932 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7933 and specifying coding systems.
7934
7935 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7936 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7937 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7938 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7939 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7940 as what to do about code conversion.)
7941
7942 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7943 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7944
7945 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7946 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7947 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7948
7949 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7950 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7951 to match against a file name.
7952
7953 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7954 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7955 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7956 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7957 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7958 specifies the coding system for encoding.
7959
7960 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7961 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7962
7963 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7964 the coding system to use for network sockets.
7965
7966 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7967 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7968 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7969 service names.
7970
7971 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7972 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7973 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7974 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7975 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7976 specifies the coding system for encoding.
7977
7978 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7979 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7980
7981 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7982 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7983 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7984 start the subprocess.
7985
7986 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7987 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7988 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7989 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7990 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7991
7992 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7993 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7994 subprocess.
7995
7996 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7997 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7998 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7999 connection permanently or until overridden.
8000
8001 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8002 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8003 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8004 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8005 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8006 system for one operation at a time.
8007
8008 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8009 files, subprocesses or network connections.
8010
8011 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8012 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8013 The value is a cons cell,
8014 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8015 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8016 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8017 input to the subprocess.
8018
8019 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8020 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8021
8022 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8023 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8024 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8025
8026 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8027 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8028 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8029 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8030 customization.
8031
8032 Thus, instead of writing
8033
8034 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8035 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8036
8037 you would now write this:
8038
8039 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8040 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8041 :type 'boolean
8042 :group foo)
8043
8044 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8045 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8046 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8047 for a description of them.
8048
8049 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8050 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8051
8052 (defgroup ispell nil
8053 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8054 :group 'processes)
8055
8056 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8057 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8058 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8059 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8060 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8061
8062 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8063 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8064 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8065 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8066 first-level subgroups.
8067
8068 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8069
8070 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8071 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8072
8073 ** easy-mmode
8074
8075 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8076 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8077 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8078 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8079 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8080 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8081
8082 ** Text property changes
8083
8084 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8085 text property.
8086
8087 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8088 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8089 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8090 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8091 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8092
8093 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8094 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8095 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8096 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8097
8098 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8099 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8100 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8101
8102 ** Changes in invisibility features
8103
8104 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8105 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8106 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8107 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8108 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8109 make the overlay visible.
8110
8111 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8112 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8113 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8114 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8115 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8116 t when it should hide it.
8117
8118 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8119
8120 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8121 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8122 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8123 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8124 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8125 Here is an example of how to do this:
8126
8127 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8128 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8129 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8130 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8131
8132 ...
8133 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8134
8135 ...
8136 ;; When done with the overlays:
8137 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8138 ;; Or respectively:
8139 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8140
8141 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
8142
8143 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8144 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8145 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8146 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8147
8148 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8149 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8150 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8151
8152 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8153 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8154
8155 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8156 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8157
8158 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8159 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8160 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8161
8162 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8163 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8164 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8165 determine the syntax type of the character.
8166
8167 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8168 of the current buffer.
8169
8170 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8171 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8172 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8173
8174 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8175 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8176 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8177 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8178 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8179
8180 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8181 text property.
8182
8183 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8184 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8185 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8186
8187 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8188 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8189 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8190 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8191 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8192
8193 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8194 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8195 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8196
8197 ** Changes in face features
8198
8199 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8200 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8201
8202 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8203 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8204
8205 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8206 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8207
8208 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8209 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8210
8211 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8212 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8213 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8214 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8215 overlay property).
8216
8217 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8218 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8219
8220 ** Changes in file-handling functions
8221
8222 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8223 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8224 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8225 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8226
8227 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8228 begins with ~.
8229
8230 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8231 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8232
8233 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8234 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8235
8236 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8237 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8238
8239 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8240 character code conversion as well as other things.
8241
8242 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8243 (formerly it did not).
8244
8245 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8246 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8247
8248 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8249 instead of constant strings.
8250
8251 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8252 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8253 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8254
8255 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8256 in the same way as before.
8257
8258 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8259 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8260 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8261
8262 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8263 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8264 else, and returns nil.
8265
8266 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8267 directory cannot be listed.
8268
8269 ** Changes in minibuffer input
8270
8271 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8272 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8273 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8274 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8275 ways:
8276
8277 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8278 It is available through the history command M-n.
8279
8280 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8281 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8282 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8283 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8284 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8285
8286 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8287 argument in this way.
8288
8289 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8290 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8291 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8292
8293 ** Echo area features
8294
8295 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8296 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8297 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8298 after the echo area is cleared.
8299
8300 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8301 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8302
8303 ** Keyboard input features
8304
8305 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8306 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8307
8308 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8309 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8310 by keyboard macros.
8311
8312 ** Frame-related changes
8313
8314 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8315 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8316 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8317
8318 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8319 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8320 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8321
8322 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8323 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8324 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8325 in the selected frame.
8326
8327 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8328 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8329 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8330
8331 ** X Windows features
8332
8333 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8334 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8335 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8336
8337 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8338 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8339
8340 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8341 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8342 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8343
8344 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8345 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8346
8347 ** Subprocess features
8348
8349 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8350 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8351 automatically.
8352
8353 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8354 and returns the output from the command as a string.
8355
8356 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8357 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8358
8359 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8360 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8361
8362 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8363 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8364 goes after the other menu items.
8365
8366 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8367 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8368 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8369 are in use.
8370
8371 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8372 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8373
8374 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8375 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8376 form.
8377
8378 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8379 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8380 but its hook is still run.
8381
8382 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8383 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8384
8385 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8386 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8387 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8388
8389 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8390 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8391 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8392 warned.
8393
8394 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8395 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8396
8397 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8398 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8399 functions like display-time.
8400
8401 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8402 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8403
8404 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8405 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8406 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8407
8408 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8409 if there is an error in compilation.
8410
8411 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8412 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8413 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8414 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8415
8416 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8417 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8418 the *scratch* buffer.
8419
8420 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8421 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8422 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8423 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8424
8425 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8426 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8427 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8428
8429 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8430 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8431 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8432 and compose-mail-other-frame.
8433
8434 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8435 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8436 full name of the specified user will be returned.
8437
8438 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8439 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8440 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8441 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8442 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8443 files at all.
8444
8445 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8446 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8447 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8448 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8449
8450 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8451 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8452 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8453 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8454
8455 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8456
8457 ** imenu.el changes.
8458
8459 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8460 item from menu created by imenu.
8461
8462 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8463 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8464 select one of those items.
8465 \f
8466 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8467 \f
8468 * Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8469
8470 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8471 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8472
8473 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8474 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8475 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8476 \f
8477 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8478
8479 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8480 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8481
8482 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8483 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8484 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8485 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8486 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8487 all caps.
8488
8489 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8490 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8491
8492 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8493 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8494 as in previous Emacs versions.
8495
8496 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8497 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8498 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8499 frames.
8500
8501 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8502 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8503 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8504 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8505 accident.
8506
8507 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8508 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8509 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8510 line and then executing the macro.
8511
8512 This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8513
8514 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8515 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8516 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8517 characters.
8518
8519 ** Font Lock mode
8520
8521 *** Font Lock support modes
8522
8523 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8524 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8525 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8526 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8527 Font Lock mode is enabled.
8528
8529 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8530
8531 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8532
8533 in your ~/.emacs.
8534
8535 *** lazy-lock
8536
8537 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8538 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8539 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8540 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8541 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8542 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8543 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8544
8545 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8546
8547 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8548
8549 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8550
8551 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8552
8553 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8554 paren and key.
8555
8556 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8557 supported.
8558
8559 ** Gnus changes.
8560
8561 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8562 commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8563 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8564 previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8565
8566 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8567 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8568
8569 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8570 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8571 obsolete.
8572
8573 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8574 missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8575
8576 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8577
8578 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8579
8580 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8581
8582 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8583 referred.
8584
8585 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8586
8587 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8588
8589 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8590
8591 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8592
8593 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8594 buffers.
8595
8596 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8597
8598 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8599
8600 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8601
8602 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8603
8604 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8605
8606 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8607
8608 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8609
8610 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8611 is possible.
8612
8613 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8614
8615 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8616 groups of groups.
8617
8618 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8619
8620 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8621 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8622
8623 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8624
8625 *** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8626
8627 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8628
8629 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8630
8631 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8632 expiration times.
8633
8634 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8635
8636 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8637 process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8638
8639 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8640 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8641 bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8642
8643 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8644 articles with the `*' command.
8645
8646 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8647
8648 *** Article headers can be buttonized.
8649
8650 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8651
8652 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8653
8654 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8655 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8656
8657 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8658 buffer.
8659
8660 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8661
8662 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8663
8664 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8665
8666 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8667
8668 *** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8669
8670 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8671
8672 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8673
8674 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8675
8676 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8677
8678 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8679 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8680
8681 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8682 refetching.
8683
8684 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8685
8686 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8687 buffer to allow easier treatment.
8688
8689 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8690
8691 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8692
8693 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8694
8695 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8696 articles.
8697
8698 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8699
8700 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8701
8702 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8703 cited text to hide is now customizable.
8704
8705 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8706
8707 *** Boring headers can be hidden.
8708
8709 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8710
8711 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8712
8713 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8714
8715 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8716 in greater detail.
8717 \f
8718 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8719
8720 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8721 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8722 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8723 exists.
8724
8725 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8726 as well as lists.
8727
8728 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8729 of a given keymap.
8730
8731 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8732 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8733 keymap or nil.
8734
8735 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8736 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8737 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8738 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8739 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8740 alias.
8741 \f
8742 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8743
8744 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8745
8746 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8747 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8748 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8749 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8750 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8751
8752 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8753 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8754 `http://www.vtw.org/'.
8755
8756 ** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8757
8758 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8759 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8760 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8761 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8762 chapter of the manual for details.
8763
8764 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8765 customization variables take effect.
8766
8767 ** Marking with the mouse.
8768
8769 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8770 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8771 using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8772
8773 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8774
8775 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8776
8777 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8778 to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8779
8780 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8781 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8782 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8783 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8784 applications, these problems are significant.
8785
8786 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8787 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8788 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8789 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8790 other DOS application as a subprocess.
8791
8792 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8793 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8794
8795 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8796 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8797 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8798 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8799 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8800 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8801
8802 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8803
8804 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8805 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8806 minibuffer contains.
8807
8808 ** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8809
8810 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8811 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8812 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8813 affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8814
8815 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8816 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8817 and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8818 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8819
8820 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8821 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8822
8823 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8824 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8825 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8826
8827 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8828 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8829 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8830 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8831
8832 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8833
8834 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8835 to replace the characters it "deletes".
8836
8837 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8838
8839 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8840 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8841 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8842 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8843 immediately after the selected one.
8844
8845 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8846 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8847
8848 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8849
8850 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8851 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8852 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8853 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8854 recover-session.
8855
8856 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8857 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8858 will not work.
8859
8860 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8861 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8862 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8863 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8864 now that the bug is fixed.
8865
8866 ** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8867
8868 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8869 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8870 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8871 which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8872
8873 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8874 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8875 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8876 the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8877
8878 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8879 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8880 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8881
8882 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8883 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8884 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8885 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8886 remain normal.
8887
8888 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8889 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8890
8891 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8892 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8893 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8894 Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8895
8896 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8897 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8898 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8899 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8900 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8901 `mail-directory-stream'.)
8902
8903 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8904 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8905 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8906 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8907
8908 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8909 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8910 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8911
8912 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8913 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8914 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8915 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8916 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8917 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8918 to a limitation in font-lock).
8919
8920 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8921
8922 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8923 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8924 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8925 this example:
8926
8927 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8928 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8929
8930 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8931
8932 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8933
8934 *** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8935
8936 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8937
8938 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8939 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8940 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8941 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8942 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8943 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8944
8945 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8946 does the same job.
8947
8948 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8949 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8950
8951 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8952 text.
8953
8954 ** Font Lock mode
8955
8956 *** Global Font Lock mode
8957
8958 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8959 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8960 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8961 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8962 on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8963
8964 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8965
8966 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8967
8968 in your ~/.emacs.
8969
8970 *** Local Refontification
8971
8972 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8973 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8974 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8975 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8976
8977 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8978 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8979 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8980 above and below point.
8981
8982 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8983
8984 ** Follow mode
8985
8986 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8987 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8988 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8989 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8990 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8991 follow-mode.
8992
8993 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8994
8995 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8996 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8997
8998 ** hide-show changes.
8999
9000 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
9001 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
9002 normal hooks.
9003
9004 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
9005 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
9006
9007 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
9008 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
9009 those that begin a function, record, or macro.
9010
9011 ** MSDOS Changes
9012
9013 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
9014 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9015
9016 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9017 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9018
9019 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9020
9021 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9022 pressing both mouse buttons.
9023
9024 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9025 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9026 are:
9027
9028 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9029 now works.
9030
9031 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9032
9033 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9034 implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9035
9036 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9037
9038 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9039
9040 **** `M-x recover-session' works.
9041
9042 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9043
9044 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
9045 \f
9046 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9047
9048 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9049 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9050 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9051 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9052 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9053
9054 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9055
9056 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9057 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9058 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9059 be different.
9060
9061 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9062 than `system-type'.
9063
9064 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9065
9066 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9067 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9068
9069 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9070 that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9071
9072 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9073 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9074 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9075
9076 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9077 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9078 like this:
9079
9080 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9081
9082 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9083 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9084 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9085
9086 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9087 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9088 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9089
9090 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9091 up if too much time passes.
9092
9093 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9094
9095 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9096 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9097 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9098 form in BODY.
9099
9100 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9101 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9102 call looks like this:
9103
9104 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9105
9106 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9107 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9108 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9109 ARGS.
9110
9111 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9112 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9113 command.
9114
9115 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9116 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9117 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9118 each time Emacs becomes idle.
9119
9120 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9121 idle for SECS seconds.
9122
9123 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9124 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9125 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9126 instead.
9127
9128 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9129 there is no answer within a certain time.
9130
9131 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9132
9133 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9134 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9135 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9136
9137 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9138 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9139 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9140 arguments in between are ignored.
9141
9142 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9143 the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9144
9145 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9146 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9147 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9148 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9149 version.
9150
9151 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9152 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9153 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9154 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9155 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9156 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9157
9158 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9159 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9160 systems with limited file name syntax.
9161
9162 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9163 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9164 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9165 completions.el:
9166
9167 (defvar save-completions-file-name
9168 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9169 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9170
9171 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9172 depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9173 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9174 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9175 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9176
9177 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9178 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9179 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9180
9181 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9182 marker from its buffer position.
9183
9184 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9185 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9186 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9187
9188 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9189 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9190 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9191 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9192 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9193 regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9194
9195 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9196 errors that happen often during editing.
9197
9198 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9199 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9200 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9201
9202 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9203 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9204
9205 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9206 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9207 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9208 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9209 and not get-buffer-window.
9210
9211 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9212 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9213 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9214
9215 If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9216 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9217 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9218 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9219 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9220 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9221 over and over for the same text.
9222
9223 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9224
9225 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9226 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9227
9228 ;; @(#) HEADER: text
9229 ;; $HEADER: text $
9230
9231 in addition to the normal
9232
9233 ;; HEADER: text
9234
9235 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9236 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9237 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9238
9239
9240 \f
9241 * For older news, see the file ONEWS
9242
9243 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
9244 Copyright information:
9245
9246 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
9247
9248 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9249 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9250 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9251 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9252
9253 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9254 of this document, or of portions of it,
9255 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9256 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9257 \f
9258 Local variables:
9259 mode: outline
9260 paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9261 end: